doc-src/TutorialI/Rules/rules.tex
author nipkow
Thu, 15 Mar 2001 15:05:51 +0100
changeset 11210 33300d16a63a
parent 11179 bee6673b020a
child 11234 6902638af59e
permissions -rw-r--r--
*** empty log message ***
Ignore whitespace changes - Everywhere: Within whitespace: At end of lines:
10792
78dfc5904eea a few extra brackets
paulson
parents: 10596
diff changeset
     1
% $Id$
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
     2
\chapter{The Rules of the Game}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
     3
\label{chap:rules}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
     4
 
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
     5
This chapter outlines the concepts and techniques that underlie reasoning
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
     6
in Isabelle.  Until now, we have proved everything using only induction and
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
     7
simplification, but any serious verification project require more elaborate
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
     8
forms of inference.  The chapter also introduces the fundamentals of
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
     9
predicate logic.  The first examples in this chapter will consist of
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
    10
detailed, low-level proof steps.  Later, we shall see how to automate such
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
    11
reasoning using the methods
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
    12
\isa{blast},
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
    13
\isa{auto} and others.  Backward or goal-directed proof is our usual style,
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
    14
but the chapter also introduces forward reasoning, where one theorem is
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
    15
transformed to yield another.
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    16
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
    17
\section{Natural Deduction}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    18
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
    19
\index{natural deduction|(}%
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    20
In Isabelle, proofs are constructed using inference rules. The 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    21
most familiar inference rule is probably \emph{modus ponens}: 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    22
\[ \infer{Q}{P\imp Q & P} \]
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    23
This rule says that from $P\imp Q$ and $P$  
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    24
we may infer~$Q$.  
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    25
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    26
%Early logical formalisms had this  
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    27
%rule and at most one or two others, along with many complicated 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    28
%axioms. Any desired theorem could be obtained by applying \emph{modus 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    29
%ponens} or other rules to the axioms, but proofs were 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    30
%hard to find. For example, a standard inference system has 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    31
%these two axioms (amongst others): 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    32
%\begin{gather*}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    33
%  P\imp(Q\imp P) \tag{K}\\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    34
%  (P\imp(Q\imp R))\imp ((P\imp Q)\imp(P\imp R))  \tag{S}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    35
%\end{gather*}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    36
%Try proving the trivial fact $P\imp P$ using these axioms and \emph{modus
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    37
%ponens}!
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    38
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
    39
\emph{Natural deduction} is an attempt to formalize logic in a way 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    40
that mirrors human reasoning patterns. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    41
%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    42
%Instead of having a few 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    43
%inference rules and many axioms, it has many inference rules 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    44
%and few axioms. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    45
%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    46
For each logical symbol (say, $\conj$), there 
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
    47
are two kinds of rules: \emph{introduction} and \emph{elimination} rules. 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    48
The introduction rules allow us to infer this symbol (say, to 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    49
infer conjunctions). The elimination rules allow us to deduce 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    50
consequences from this symbol. Ideally each rule should mention 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    51
one symbol only.  For predicate logic this can be 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    52
done, but when users define their own concepts they typically 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    53
have to refer to other symbols as well.  It is best not be dogmatic.
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    54
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    55
Natural deduction generally deserves its name.  It is easy to use.  Each
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    56
proof step consists of identifying the outermost symbol of a formula and
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    57
applying the corresponding rule.  It creates new subgoals in
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    58
an obvious way from parts of the chosen formula.  Expanding the
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    59
definitions of constants can blow up the goal enormously.  Deriving natural
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    60
deduction rules for such constants lets us reason in terms of their key
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    61
properties, which might otherwise be obscured by the technicalities of its
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    62
definition.  Natural deduction rules also lend themselves to automation.
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    63
Isabelle's
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
    64
\emph{classical  reasoner} accepts any suitable  collection of natural deduction
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    65
rules and uses them to search for proofs automatically.  Isabelle is designed around
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
    66
natural deduction and many of its tools use the terminology of introduction
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
    67
and elimination rules.%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
    68
\index{natural deduction|)}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    69
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    70
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
    71
\section{Introduction Rules}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    72
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
    73
\index{introduction rules|(}%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
    74
An introduction rule tells us when we can infer a formula 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    75
containing a specific logical symbol. For example, the conjunction 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    76
introduction rule says that if we have $P$ and if we have $Q$ then 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    77
we have $P\conj Q$. In a mathematics text, it is typically shown 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    78
like this:
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    79
\[  \infer{P\conj Q}{P & Q} \]
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    80
The rule introduces the conjunction
10971
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
    81
symbol~($\conj$) in its conclusion.  In Isabelle proofs we
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    82
mainly  reason backwards.  When we apply this rule, the subgoal already has
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    83
the form of a conjunction; the proof step makes this conjunction symbol
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    84
disappear. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    85
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    86
In Isabelle notation, the rule looks like this:
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    87
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    88
\isasymlbrakk?P;\ ?Q\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?P\ \isasymand\ ?Q\rulename{conjI}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    89
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    90
Carefully examine the syntax.  The premises appear to the
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    91
left of the arrow and the conclusion to the right.  The premises (if 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    92
more than one) are grouped using the fat brackets.  The question marks
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    93
indicate \textbf{schematic variables} (also called \textbf{unknowns}): they may
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    94
be replaced by arbitrary formulas.  If we use the rule backwards, Isabelle
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    95
tries to unify the current subgoal with the conclusion of the rule, which
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    96
has the form \isa{?P\ \isasymand\ ?Q}.  (Unification is discussed below,
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    97
\S\ref{sec:unification}.)  If successful,
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    98
it yields new subgoals given by the formulas assigned to 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
    99
\isa{?P} and \isa{?Q}.
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   100
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   101
The following trivial proof illustrates this point. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   102
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   103
\isacommand{lemma}\ conj_rule:\ "\isasymlbrakk P;\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   104
Q\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ P\ \isasymand\
10301
paulson
parents: 10295
diff changeset
   105
(Q\ \isasymand\ P)"\isanewline
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   106
\isacommand{apply}\ (rule\ conjI)\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   107
\ \isacommand{apply}\ assumption\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   108
\isacommand{apply}\ (rule\ conjI)\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   109
\ \isacommand{apply}\ assumption\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   110
\isacommand{apply}\ assumption
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   111
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   112
At the start, Isabelle presents 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   113
us with the assumptions (\isa{P} and~\isa{Q}) and with the goal to be proved,
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   114
\isa{P\ \isasymand\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   115
(Q\ \isasymand\ P)}.  We are working backwards, so when we
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   116
apply conjunction introduction, the rule removes the outermost occurrence
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   117
of the \isa{\isasymand} symbol.  To apply a  rule to a subgoal, we apply
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   118
the proof method \isa{rule} --- here with {\isa{conjI}}, the  conjunction
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   119
introduction rule. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   120
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   121
%\isasymlbrakk P;\ Q\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ P\ \isasymand\ Q\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   122
%\isasymand\ P\isanewline
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   123
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk P;\ Q\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ P\isanewline
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   124
\ 2.\ \isasymlbrakk P;\ Q\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ Q\ \isasymand\ P
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   125
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   126
Isabelle leaves two new subgoals: the two halves of the original conjunction. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   127
The first is simply \isa{P}, which is trivial, since \isa{P} is among 
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   128
the assumptions.  We can apply the \isa{assumption} 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   129
method, which proves a subgoal by finding a matching assumption.
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   130
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   131
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk P;\ Q\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   132
Q\ \isasymand\ P
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   133
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   134
We are left with the subgoal of proving  
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   135
\isa{Q\ \isasymand\ P} from the assumptions \isa{P} and~\isa{Q}.  We apply
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   136
\isa{rule conjI} again. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   137
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   138
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk P;\ Q\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ Q\isanewline
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   139
\ 2.\ \isasymlbrakk P;\ Q\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ P
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   140
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   141
We are left with two new subgoals, \isa{Q} and~\isa{P}, each of which can be proved
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   142
using the \isa{assumption} method.%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   143
\index{introduction rules|)}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   144
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   145
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   146
\section{Elimination Rules}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   147
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   148
\index{elimination rules|(}%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   149
Elimination rules work in the opposite direction from introduction 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   150
rules. In the case of conjunction, there are two such rules. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   151
From $P\conj Q$ we infer $P$. also, from $P\conj Q$  
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   152
we infer $Q$:
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   153
\[ \infer{P}{P\conj Q} \qquad \infer{Q}{P\conj Q}  \]
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   154
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   155
Now consider disjunction. There are two introduction rules, which resemble inverted forms of the
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   156
conjunction elimination rules:
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   157
\[ \infer{P\disj Q}{P} \qquad \infer{P\disj Q}{Q}  \]
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   158
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   159
What is the disjunction elimination rule?  The situation is rather different from 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   160
conjunction.  From $P\disj Q$ we cannot conclude  that $P$ is true and we
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   161
cannot conclude that $Q$ is true; there are no direct
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   162
elimination rules of the sort that we have seen for conjunction.  Instead,
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   163
there is an elimination  rule that works indirectly.  If we are trying  to prove
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   164
something else, say $R$, and we know that $P\disj Q$ holds,  then we have to consider
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   165
two cases.  We can assume that $P$ is true  and prove $R$ and then assume that $Q$ is
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   166
true and prove $R$ a second  time.  Here we see a fundamental concept used in natural
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   167
deduction:  that of the \emph{assumptions}. We have to prove $R$ twice, under
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   168
different assumptions.  The assumptions are local to these subproofs and are visible 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   169
nowhere else. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   170
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   171
In a logic text, the disjunction elimination rule might be shown 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   172
like this:
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   173
\[ \infer{R}{P\disj Q & \infer*{R}{[P]} & \infer*{R}{[Q]}} \]
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   174
The assumptions $[P]$ and $[Q]$ are bracketed 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   175
to emphasize that they are local to their subproofs.  In Isabelle 
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   176
notation, the already-familiar \isa{\isasymLongrightarrow} syntax serves the
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   177
same  purpose:
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   178
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   179
\isasymlbrakk?P\ \isasymor\ ?Q;\ ?P\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?R;\ ?Q\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?R\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?R\rulename{disjE}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   180
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   181
When we use this sort of elimination rule backwards, it produces 
10971
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
   182
a case split.  (We have seen this before, in proofs by induction.)  The following  proof
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   183
illustrates the use of disjunction elimination.  
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   184
\begin{isabelle}
10301
paulson
parents: 10295
diff changeset
   185
\isacommand{lemma}\ disj_swap:\ "P\ \isasymor\ Q\ 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   186
\isasymLongrightarrow\ Q\ \isasymor\ P"\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   187
\isacommand{apply}\ (erule\ disjE)\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   188
\ \isacommand{apply}\ (rule\ disjI2)\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   189
\ \isacommand{apply}\ assumption\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   190
\isacommand{apply}\ (rule\ disjI1)\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   191
\isacommand{apply}\ assumption
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   192
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   193
We assume \isa{P\ \isasymor\ Q} and
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   194
must prove \isa{Q\ \isasymor\ P}\@.  Our first step uses the disjunction
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   195
elimination rule, \isa{disjE}.  We invoke it using \isa{erule}, a method
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   196
designed to work with elimination rules.  It looks for an assumption that
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   197
matches the rule's first premise.  It deletes the matching assumption,
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   198
regards the first premise as proved and returns subgoals corresponding to
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   199
the remaining premises.  When we apply \isa{erule} to \isa{disjE}, only two
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   200
subgoals result.  This is better than applying it using \isa{rule}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   201
to get three subgoals, then proving the first by assumption: the other
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   202
subgoals would have the redundant assumption 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   203
\hbox{\isa{P\ \isasymor\ Q}}.
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   204
Most of the
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   205
time, \isa{erule} is  the best way to use elimination rules.  Only rarely
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   206
can an assumption be used more than once.
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   207
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   208
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   209
%P\ \isasymor\ Q\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ Q\ \isasymor\ P\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   210
\ 1.\ P\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ Q\ \isasymor\ P\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   211
\ 2.\ Q\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ Q\ \isasymor\ P
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   212
\end{isabelle}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   213
These are the two subgoals returned by \isa{erule}.  The first assumes
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   214
\isa{P} and the  second assumes \isa{Q}.  Tackling the first subgoal, we
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   215
need to  show \isa{Q\ \isasymor\ P}\@.  The second introduction rule
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   216
(\isa{disjI2}) can reduce this  to \isa{P}, which matches the assumption.
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   217
So, we apply the
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   218
\isa{rule}  method with \isa{disjI2} \ldots
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   219
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   220
\ 1.\ P\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ P\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   221
\ 2.\ Q\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ Q\ \isasymor\ P
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   222
\end{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   223
\ldots and finish off with the \isa{assumption} 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   224
method.  We are left with the other subgoal, which 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   225
assumes \isa{Q}.  
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   226
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   227
\ 1.\ Q\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ Q\ \isasymor\ P
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   228
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   229
Its proof is similar, using the introduction 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   230
rule \isa{disjI1}. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   231
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   232
The result of this proof is a new inference rule \isa{disj_swap}, which is neither 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   233
an introduction nor an elimination rule, but which might 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   234
be useful.  We can use it to replace any goal of the form $Q\disj P$
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   235
by a one of the form $P\disj Q$.%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   236
\index{elimination rules|)}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   237
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   238
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   239
\section{Destruction Rules: Some Examples}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   240
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   241
\index{destruction rules|(}%
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   242
Now let us examine the analogous proof for conjunction. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   243
\begin{isabelle}
10301
paulson
parents: 10295
diff changeset
   244
\isacommand{lemma}\ conj_swap:\ "P\ \isasymand\ Q\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ Q\ \isasymand\ P"\isanewline
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   245
\isacommand{apply}\ (rule\ conjI)\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   246
\ \isacommand{apply}\ (drule\ conjunct2)\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   247
\ \isacommand{apply}\ assumption\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   248
\isacommand{apply}\ (drule\ conjunct1)\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   249
\isacommand{apply}\ assumption
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   250
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   251
Recall that the conjunction elimination rules --- whose Isabelle names are 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   252
\isa{conjunct1} and \isa{conjunct2} --- simply return the first or second half
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   253
of a conjunction.  Rules of this sort (where the conclusion is a subformula of a
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   254
premise) are called \emph{destruction} rules because they take apart and destroy
10978
5eebea8f359f *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10971
diff changeset
   255
a premise.%
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   256
\footnote{This Isabelle terminology has no counterpart in standard logic texts, 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   257
although the distinction between the two forms of elimination rule is well known. 
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   258
Girard \cite[page 74]{girard89}, for example, writes ``The elimination rules 
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   259
[for $\disj$ and $\exists$] are very
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   260
bad.  What is catastrophic about them is the parasitic presence of a formula [$R$]
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   261
which has no structural link with the formula which is eliminated.''}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   262
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   263
The first proof step applies conjunction introduction, leaving 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   264
two subgoals: 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   265
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   266
%P\ \isasymand\ Q\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ Q\ \isasymand\ P\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   267
\ 1.\ P\ \isasymand\ Q\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ Q\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   268
\ 2.\ P\ \isasymand\ Q\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ P
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   269
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   270
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   271
To invoke the elimination rule, we apply a new method, \isa{drule}. 
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   272
Think of the \isa{d} as standing for \emph{destruction} (or \emph{direct}, if
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   273
you prefer).   Applying the 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   274
second conjunction rule using \isa{drule} replaces the assumption 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   275
\isa{P\ \isasymand\ Q} by \isa{Q}. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   276
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   277
\ 1.\ Q\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ Q\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   278
\ 2.\ P\ \isasymand\ Q\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ P
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   279
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   280
The resulting subgoal can be proved by applying \isa{assumption}.
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   281
The other subgoal is similarly proved, using the \isa{conjunct1} rule and the 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   282
\isa{assumption} method.
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   283
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   284
Choosing among the methods \isa{rule}, \isa{erule} and \isa{drule} is up to 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   285
you.  Isabelle does not attempt to work out whether a rule 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   286
is an introduction rule or an elimination rule.  The 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   287
method determines how the rule will be interpreted. Many rules 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   288
can be used in more than one way.  For example, \isa{disj_swap} can 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   289
be applied to assumptions as well as to goals; it replaces any
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   290
assumption of the form
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   291
$P\disj Q$ by a one of the form $Q\disj P$.
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   292
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   293
Destruction rules are simpler in form than indirect rules such as \isa{disjE},
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   294
but they can be inconvenient.  Each of the conjunction rules discards half 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   295
of the formula, when usually we want to take both parts of the conjunction as new
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   296
assumptions.  The easiest way to do so is by using an 
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   297
alternative conjunction elimination rule that resembles \isa{disjE}\@.  It is
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   298
seldom, if ever, seen in logic books.  In Isabelle syntax it looks like this: 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   299
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   300
\isasymlbrakk?P\ \isasymand\ ?Q;\ \isasymlbrakk?P;\ ?Q\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?R\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?R\rulename{conjE}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   301
\end{isabelle}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   302
\index{destruction rules|)}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   303
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   304
\begin{exercise}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   305
Use the rule \isa{conjE} to shorten the proof above. 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   306
\end{exercise}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   307
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   308
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   309
\section{Implication}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   310
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   311
\index{implication|(}%
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   312
At the start of this chapter, we saw the rule \textit{modus ponens}.  It is, in fact,
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   313
a destruction rule. The matching introduction rule looks like this 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   314
in Isabelle: 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   315
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   316
(?P\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?Q)\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?P\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   317
\isasymlongrightarrow\ ?Q\rulename{impI}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   318
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   319
And this is \textit{modus ponens}:
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   320
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   321
\isasymlbrakk?P\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ ?Q;\ ?P\isasymrbrakk\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   322
\isasymLongrightarrow\ ?Q
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   323
\rulename{mp}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   324
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   325
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   326
Here is a proof using the implication rules.  This 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   327
lemma performs a sort of uncurrying, replacing the two antecedents 
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   328
of a nested implication by a conjunction.  The proof illustrates
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   329
how assumptions work.  At each proof step, the subgoals inherit the previous
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   330
assumptions, perhaps with additions or deletions.  Rules such as
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   331
\isa{impI} and \isa{disjE} add assumptions, while applying \isa{erule} or
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   332
\isa{drule} deletes the matching assumption.
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   333
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   334
\isacommand{lemma}\ imp_uncurry:\
10301
paulson
parents: 10295
diff changeset
   335
"P\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ (Q\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   336
\isasymlongrightarrow\ R)\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ P\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   337
\isasymand\ Q\ \isasymlongrightarrow\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   338
R"\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   339
\isacommand{apply}\ (rule\ impI)\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   340
\isacommand{apply}\ (erule\ conjE)\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   341
\isacommand{apply}\ (drule\ mp)\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   342
\ \isacommand{apply}\ assumption\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   343
\isacommand{apply}\ (drule\ mp)\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   344
\ \ \isacommand{apply}\ assumption\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   345
\ \isacommand{apply}\ assumption
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   346
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   347
First, we state the lemma and apply implication introduction (\isa{rule impI}), 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   348
which moves the conjunction to the assumptions. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   349
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   350
%P\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ Q\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ R\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ P\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   351
%\isasymand\ Q\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ R\isanewline
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   352
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk P\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ Q\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ R;\ P\ \isasymand\ Q\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ R
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   353
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   354
Next, we apply conjunction elimination (\isa{erule conjE}), which splits this
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   355
conjunction into two  parts. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   356
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   357
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk P\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ Q\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ R;\ P;\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   358
Q\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ R
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   359
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   360
Now, we work on the assumption \isa{P\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ (Q\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   361
\isasymlongrightarrow\ R)}, where the parentheses have been inserted for
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   362
clarity.  The nested implication requires two applications of
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   363
\textit{modus ponens}: \isa{drule mp}.  The first use  yields the
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   364
implication \isa{Q\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   365
\isasymlongrightarrow\ R}, but first we must prove the extra subgoal 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   366
\isa{P}, which we do by assumption. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   367
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   368
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk P;\ Q\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ P\isanewline
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   369
\ 2.\ \isasymlbrakk P;\ Q;\ Q\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ R\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ R
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   370
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   371
Repeating these steps for \isa{Q\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   372
\isasymlongrightarrow\ R} yields the conclusion we seek, namely~\isa{R}.
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   373
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   374
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk P;\ Q;\ Q\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ R\isasymrbrakk\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   375
\isasymLongrightarrow\ R
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   376
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   377
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   378
The symbols \isa{\isasymLongrightarrow} and \isa{\isasymlongrightarrow}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   379
both stand for implication, but they differ in many respects.  Isabelle
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   380
uses \isa{\isasymLongrightarrow} to express inference rules; the symbol is
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   381
built-in and Isabelle's inference mechanisms treat it specially.  On the
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   382
other hand, \isa{\isasymlongrightarrow} is just one of the many connectives
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   383
available in higher-order logic.  We reason about it using inference rules
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   384
such as \isa{impI} and \isa{mp}, just as we reason about the other
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   385
connectives.  You will have to use \isa{\isasymlongrightarrow} in any
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   386
context that requires a formula of higher-order logic.  Use
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   387
\isa{\isasymLongrightarrow} to separate a theorem's preconditions from its
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   388
conclusion.%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   389
\index{implication|)}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   390
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   391
\medskip
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   392
The \isacommand{by} command is useful for proofs like these that use
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   393
\isa{assumption} heavily.  It executes an
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   394
\isacommand{apply} command, then tries to prove all remaining subgoals using
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   395
\isa{assumption}.  Since (if successful) it ends the proof, it also replaces the 
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   396
\isacommand{done} symbol.  For example, the proof above can be shortened:
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   397
\begin{isabelle}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   398
\isacommand{lemma}\ imp_uncurry:\
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   399
"P\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ (Q\
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   400
\isasymlongrightarrow\ R)\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ P\
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   401
\isasymand\ Q\ \isasymlongrightarrow\
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   402
R"\isanewline
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   403
\isacommand{apply}\ (rule\ impI)\isanewline
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   404
\isacommand{apply}\ (erule\ conjE)\isanewline
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   405
\isacommand{apply}\ (drule\ mp)\isanewline
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   406
\ \isacommand{apply}\ assumption\isanewline
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   407
\isacommand{by}\ (drule\ mp)
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   408
\end{isabelle}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   409
We could use \isacommand{by} to replace the final \isacommand{apply} and
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   410
\isacommand{done} in any proof, but typically we use it
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   411
to eliminate calls to \isa{assumption}.  It is also a nice way of expressing a
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   412
one-line proof.
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   413
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   414
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   415
\section{Negation}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   416
 
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   417
\index{negation|(}%
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   418
Negation causes surprising complexity in proofs.  Its natural 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   419
deduction rules are straightforward, but additional rules seem 
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   420
necessary in order to handle negated assumptions gracefully.  This section
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   421
also illustrates the \isa{intro} method: a convenient way of
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   422
applying introduction rules.
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   423
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   424
Negation introduction deduces $\neg P$ if assuming $P$ leads to a 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   425
contradiction. Negation elimination deduces any formula in the 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   426
presence of $\neg P$ together with~$P$: 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   427
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   428
(?P\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ False)\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ \isasymnot\ ?P%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   429
\rulename{notI}\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   430
\isasymlbrakk{\isasymnot}\ ?P;\ ?P\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?R%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   431
\rulename{notE}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   432
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   433
%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   434
Classical logic allows us to assume $\neg P$ 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   435
when attempting to prove~$P$: 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   436
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   437
(\isasymnot\ ?P\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?P)\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?P%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   438
\rulename{classical}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   439
\end{isabelle}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   440
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   441
The implications $P\imp Q$ and $\neg Q\imp\neg P$ are logically
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   442
equivalent, and each is called the
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   443
\bfindex{contrapositive} of the other.  Three further rules support
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   444
reasoning about contrapositives.  They differ in the placement of the
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   445
negation symbols: 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   446
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   447
\isasymlbrakk?Q;\ \isasymnot\ ?P\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ \isasymnot\ ?Q\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?P%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   448
\rulename{contrapos_pp}\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   449
\isasymlbrakk{\isasymnot}\ ?Q;\ \isasymnot\ ?P\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?Q\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?P%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   450
\rulename{contrapos_np}\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   451
\isasymlbrakk{\isasymnot}\ ?Q;\ ?P\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?Q\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ \isasymnot\ ?P%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   452
\rulename{contrapos_nn}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   453
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   454
%
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   455
These rules are typically applied using the \isa{erule} method, where 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   456
their effect is to form a contrapositive from an 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   457
assumption and the goal's conclusion.  
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   458
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   459
The most important of these is \isa{contrapos_np}.  It is useful
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   460
for applying introduction rules to negated assumptions.  For instance, 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   461
the assumption $\neg(P\imp Q)$ is equivalent to the conclusion $P\imp Q$ and we 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   462
might want to use conjunction introduction on it. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   463
Before we can do so, we must move that assumption so that it 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   464
becomes the conclusion. The following proof demonstrates this 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   465
technique: 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   466
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   467
\isacommand{lemma}\ "\isasymlbrakk{\isasymnot}(P{\isasymlongrightarrow}Q);\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   468
\isasymnot(R{\isasymlongrightarrow}Q)\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   469
R"\isanewline
10971
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
   470
\isacommand{apply}\ (erule_tac\ Q = "R{\isasymlongrightarrow}Q"\ \isakeyword{in}\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   471
contrapos_np)\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   472
\isacommand{apply}\ intro\isanewline
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   473
\isacommand{by}\ (erule\ notE)
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   474
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   475
%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   476
There are two negated assumptions and we need to exchange the conclusion with the
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   477
second one.  The method \isa{erule contrapos_np} would select the first assumption,
11179
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   478
which we do not want.  So we specify the desired assumption explicitly
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   479
using a new method, \isa{erule_tac}.  This is the resulting subgoal: 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   480
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   481
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk{\isasymnot}\ (P\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ Q);\ \isasymnot\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   482
R\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ R\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ Q%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   483
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   484
The former conclusion, namely \isa{R}, now appears negated among the assumptions,
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   485
while the negated formula \isa{R\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ Q} becomes the new
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   486
conclusion.
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   487
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   488
We can now apply introduction rules.  We use the {\isa{intro}} method, which
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   489
repeatedly  applies built-in introduction rules.  Here its effect is equivalent
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   490
to \isa{rule impI}.
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   491
\begin{isabelle}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   492
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk{\isasymnot}\ (P\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ Q);\ \isasymnot\ R;\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   493
R\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ Q%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   494
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   495
We can see a contradiction in the form of assumptions \isa{\isasymnot\ R}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   496
and~\isa{R}, which suggests using negation elimination.  If applied on its own,
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   497
\isa{notE} will select the first negated assumption, which is useless.  
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   498
Instead, we invoke the rule using the
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   499
\isa{by} command.
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   500
Now when Isabelle selects the first assumption, it tries to prove \isa{P\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   501
\isasymlongrightarrow\ Q} and fails; it then backtracks, finds the 
10971
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
   502
assumption \isa{\isasymnot~R} and finally proves \isa{R} by assumption.  That
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   503
concludes the proof.
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   504
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   505
\medskip
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   506
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   507
The following example may be skipped on a first reading.  It involves a
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   508
peculiar but important rule, a form of disjunction introduction:
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   509
\begin{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   510
(\isasymnot \ ?Q\ \isasymLongrightarrow \ ?P)\ \isasymLongrightarrow \ ?P\ \isasymor \ ?Q%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   511
\rulename{disjCI}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   512
\end{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   513
This rule combines the effects of \isa{disjI1} and \isa{disjI2}.  Its great
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   514
advantage is that we can remove the disjunction symbol without deciding
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   515
which disjunction to prove.%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   516
\footnote{This type of reasoning is standard in sequent and tableau
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   517
calculi.}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   518
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   519
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   520
\isacommand{lemma}\ "(P\ \isasymor\ Q)\ \isasymand\ R\
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   521
\isasymLongrightarrow\ P\ \isasymor\ (Q\ \isasymand\ R)"\isanewline
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   522
\isacommand{apply}\ intro\isanewline
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   523
\isacommand{apply}\ (elim\ conjE\ disjE)\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   524
\ \isacommand{apply}\ assumption
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   525
\isanewline
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   526
\isacommand{by}\ (erule\ contrapos_np,\ rule\ conjI)
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   527
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   528
%
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   529
The first proof step applies the \isa{intro} method, which repeatedly  uses
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   530
built-in introduction rules.  Among these are \isa{disjCI}, which creates
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   531
the negative assumption 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   532
\hbox{\isa{\isasymnot(Q\ \isasymand\ R)}}.  
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   533
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   534
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   535
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk(P\ \isasymor\ Q)\ \isasymand\ R;\ \isasymnot\ (Q\ \isasymand\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   536
R)\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ P%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   537
\end{isabelle}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   538
Next we apply the \isa{elim} method, which repeatedly applies 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   539
elimination rules; here, the elimination rules given 
10971
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
   540
in the command.  One of the subgoals is trivial (\isa{\isacommand{apply} assumption}),
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
   541
leaving us with one other:
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   542
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   543
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk{\isasymnot}\ (Q\ \isasymand\ R);\ R;\ Q\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ P%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   544
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   545
%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   546
Now we must move the formula \isa{Q\ \isasymand\ R} to be the conclusion.  The
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   547
combination 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   548
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   549
\ \ \ \ \ (erule\ contrapos_np,\ rule\ conjI)
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   550
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   551
is robust: the \isa{conjI} forces the \isa{erule} to select a
10301
paulson
parents: 10295
diff changeset
   552
conjunction.  The two subgoals are the ones we would expect from applying
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   553
conjunction introduction to
10971
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
   554
\isa{Q~\isasymand~R}:  
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   555
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   556
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk R;\ Q;\ \isasymnot\ P\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   557
Q\isanewline
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   558
\ 2.\ \isasymlbrakk R;\ Q;\ \isasymnot\ P\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ R%
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   559
\end{isabelle}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   560
They are proved by assumption, which is implicit in the \isacommand{by}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   561
command.%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   562
\index{negation|)}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   563
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   564
11179
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   565
\section{Interlude: the Basic Methods for Rules}
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   566
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   567
We have seen examples of many tactics that operate on individual rules.  It
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   568
may be helpful to review how they work given an arbitrary rule such as this:
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   569
\[ \infer{Q}{P@1 & \ldots & P@n} \]
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   570
Below, we refer to $P@1$ as the \textbf{major premise}.  This concept
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   571
applies only to elimination and destruction rules.  These rules act upon an
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   572
instance of their major premise, typically to replace it by other
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   573
assumptions.
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   574
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   575
Suppose that the rule above is called~\isa{R}\@.  Here are the basic rule
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   576
methods, most of which we have already seen:
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   577
\begin{itemize}
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   578
\item 
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   579
Method \isa{rule\ R} unifies~$Q$ with the current subgoal, which it
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   580
replaces by $n$ new subgoals, to prove instances of $P@1$, \ldots,~$P@n$. 
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   581
This is  backward reasoning and is appropriate for introduction rules.
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   582
\item 
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   583
Method \isa{erule\ R} unifies~$Q$ with the current subgoal and
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   584
simultaneously unifies $P@1$ with some assumption.  The subgoal is 
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   585
replaced by the $n-1$ new subgoals of proving
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   586
instances of $P@2$,
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   587
\ldots,~$P@n$, with the matching assumption deleted.  It is appropriate for
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   588
elimination rules.  The method
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   589
\isa{(rule\ R,\ assumption)} is similar, but it does not delete an
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   590
assumption.
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   591
\item 
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   592
Method \isa{drule\ R} unifies $P@1$ with some assumption, which is
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   593
then deleted.  The subgoal is 
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   594
replaced by the $n-1$ new subgoals of proving $P@2$, \ldots,~$P@n$; an
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   595
$n$th subgoal is like the original one but has an additional assumption: an
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   596
instance of~$Q$.  It is appropriate for destruction rules. 
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   597
\item 
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   598
Method \isa{frule\ R} is like \isa{drule\ R} except that the matching
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   599
assumption is not deleted.  (See \S\ref{sec:frule} below.)
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   600
\end{itemize}
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   601
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   602
When applying a rule, we can constrain some of its
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   603
variables: 
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   604
\begin{isabelle}
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   605
\ \ \ \ \ rule_tac\ $v@1$ = $t@1$ \isakeyword{and} \ldots \isakeyword{and}
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   606
$v@k$ =
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   607
$t@k$ \isakeyword{in} R
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   608
\end{isabelle}
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   609
This method behaves like \isa{rule R}, while instantiating the variables
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   610
$v@1$, \ldots,
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   611
$v@k$ as specified.  We similarly have \isa{erule_tac}, \isa{drule_tac} and
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   612
\isa{frule_tac}.  These methods also let us specify which subgoal to
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   613
operate on.  By default it is the first subgoal, as with nearly all
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   614
methods, but we can specify that rule \isa{R} should be applied to subgoal
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   615
number~$i$:
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   616
\begin{isabelle}
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   617
\ \ \ \ \ rule_tac\ [$i$] R
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   618
\end{isabelle}
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   619
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   620
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   621
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   622
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   623
\section{Unification and Substitution}\label{sec:unification}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   624
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   625
\index{unification|(}%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   626
As we have seen, Isabelle rules involve schematic variables that begin with
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   627
a question mark and act as
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   628
placeholders for terms.  \emph{Unification} refers to  the process of
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   629
making two terms identical, possibly by replacing their schematic variables by
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   630
terms.  The simplest case is when the two terms  are already the same. Next
11179
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   631
simplest is when the variables in only one of the term
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   632
 are replaced; this is called pattern-matching.  The
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   633
\isa{rule} method typically  matches the rule's conclusion
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   634
against the current subgoal.  In the most complex case,  variables in both
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   635
terms are replaced; the \isa{rule} method can do this if the goal
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   636
itself contains schematic variables.  Other occurrences of the variables in
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   637
the rule or proof state are updated at the same time.
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   638
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   639
Schematic variables in goals represent unknown terms.  Given a goal such
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   640
as $\exists x.\,P$, they let us proceed with a proof.  They can be 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   641
filled in later, sometimes in stages and often automatically. 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   642
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   643
Unification is well known to Prolog programmers. Isabelle uses
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   644
\emph{higher-order} unification, which works in the
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   645
typed $\lambda$-calculus.  The general case is
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   646
undecidable, but for our purposes, the differences from ordinary
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   647
unification are straightforward.  It handles bound  variables
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   648
correctly, avoiding capture.  The two terms \isa{{\isasymlambda}x.\ ?P} and
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   649
\isa{{\isasymlambda}x.\ t x}  are not unifiable; replacing \isa{?P} by
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   650
\isa{t x} is forbidden because the free occurrence of~\isa{x} would become
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   651
bound.  The two terms
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   652
\isa{{\isasymlambda}x.\ f(x,z)} and \isa{{\isasymlambda}y.\ f(y,z)} are
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   653
trivially unifiable because they differ only by a bound variable renaming.
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   654
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   655
\begin{warn}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   656
Higher-order unification sometimes must invent
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   657
$\lambda$-terms to replace function  variables,
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   658
which can lead to a combinatorial explosion. However,  Isabelle proofs tend
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   659
to involve easy cases where there are few possibilities for the
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   660
$\lambda$-term being constructed. In the easiest case, the
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   661
function variable is applied only to bound variables, 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   662
as when we try to unify \isa{{\isasymlambda}x\ y.\ f(?h x y)} and
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   663
\isa{{\isasymlambda}x\ y.\ f(x+y+a)}.  The only solution is to replace
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   664
\isa{?h} by \isa{{\isasymlambda}x\ y.\ x+y+a}.  Such cases admit at most
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   665
one unifier, like ordinary unification.  A harder case is
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   666
unifying \isa{?h a} with~\isa{a+b}; it admits two solutions for \isa{?h},
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   667
namely \isa{{\isasymlambda}x.~a+b} and \isa{{\isasymlambda}x.~x+b}. 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   668
Unifying \isa{?h a} with~\isa{a+a+b} admits four solutions; their number is
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   669
exponential in the number of occurrences of~\isa{a} in the second term.
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   670
\end{warn}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   671
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   672
11179
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   673
\subsection{Substitution and the {\tt\slshape subst} Method}
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   674
\label{sec:subst}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   675
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   676
\index{substitution|(}%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   677
Isabelle also uses function variables to express \emph{substitution}. 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   678
A typical substitution rule allows us to replace one term by 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   679
another if we know that two terms are equal. 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   680
\[ \infer{P[t/x]}{s=t & P[s/x]} \]
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   681
The rule uses a notation for substitution: $P[t/x]$ is the result of
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   682
replacing $x$ by~$t$ in~$P$.  The rule only substitutes in the positions
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   683
designated by~$x$.  For example, it can
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   684
derive symmetry of equality from reflexivity.  Using $x=s$ for~$P$
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   685
replaces just the first $s$ in $s=s$ by~$t$:
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   686
\[ \infer{t=s}{s=t & \infer{s=s}{}} \]
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   687
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   688
The Isabelle version of the substitution rule looks like this: 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   689
\begin{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   690
\isasymlbrakk?t\ =\ ?s;\ ?P\ ?s\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?P\
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   691
?t
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   692
\rulename{ssubst}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   693
\end{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   694
Crucially, \isa{?P} is a function 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   695
variable: it can be replaced by a $\lambda$-expression 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   696
involving one bound variable whose occurrences identify the places 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   697
in which $s$ will be replaced by~$t$.  The proof above requires
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   698
\isa{{\isasymlambda}x.~x=s}.
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   699
11179
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   700
The \isa{simp} method replaces equals by equals, but the substitution
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   701
rule gives us more control.  The \isa{subst} method is the easiest way to
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   702
use the substitution rule.  Suppose a
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   703
proof has reached this point:
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   704
\begin{isabelle}
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   705
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk P\ x\ y\ z;\ Suc\ x\ <\ y\isasymrbrakk \ \isasymLongrightarrow \ f\ z\ =\ x\ *\ y%
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   706
\end{isabelle}
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   707
Now we wish to apply a commutative law:
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   708
\begin{isabelle}
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   709
?m\ *\ ?n\ =\ ?n\ *\ ?m%
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   710
\rulename{mult_commute}
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   711
\end{isabelle}
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   712
Isabelle rejects our first attempt:
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   713
\begin{isabelle}
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   714
apply (simp add: mult_commute)
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   715
\end{isabelle}
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   716
The simplifier notices the danger of looping and refuses to apply the
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   717
rule.%
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   718
\footnote{More precisely, it only applies such a rule if the new term is
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   719
smaller under a specified ordering; here, \isa{x\ *\ y}
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   720
is already smaller than
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   721
\isa{y\ *\ x}.}
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   722
%
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   723
The \isa{subst} method applies \isa{mult_commute} exactly once.  
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   724
\begin{isabelle}
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   725
\isacommand{apply}\ (subst\ mult_commute)\isanewline
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   726
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk P\ x\ y\ z;\ Suc\ x\ <\ y\isasymrbrakk \
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   727
\isasymLongrightarrow \ f\ z\ =\ y\ *\ x%
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   728
\end{isabelle}
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   729
As we wanted, \isa{x\ *\ y} has become \isa{y\ *\ x}.
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   730
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   731
\medskip
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   732
The \isa{subst} method is convenient, but to see how it works, let us
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   733
examine an explicit use of the rule \isa{ssubst}.
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   734
Consider this proof: 
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   735
\begin{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   736
\isacommand{lemma}\
11179
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   737
"\isasymlbrakk x\ =\ f\ x;\ odd(f\ x)\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   738
odd\ x"\isanewline
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   739
\isacommand{by}\ (erule\ ssubst)
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   740
\end{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   741
%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   742
The simplifier might loop, replacing \isa{x} by \isa{f x} and then by
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   743
\isa{f(f x)} and so forth. (Here \isa{simp} 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   744
can see the danger and would re-orient the equality, but in more complicated
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   745
cases it can be fooled.) When we apply substitution,  Isabelle replaces every
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   746
\isa{x} in the subgoal by \isa{f x} just once: it cannot loop.  The
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   747
resulting subgoal is trivial by assumption, so the \isacommand{by} command
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   748
proves it implicitly. 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   749
11179
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   750
We are using the \isa{erule} method it in a novel way. Hitherto, 
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   751
the conclusion of the rule was just a variable such as~\isa{?R}, but it may
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   752
be any term. The conclusion is unified with the subgoal just as 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   753
it would be with the \isa{rule} method. At the same time \isa{erule} looks 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   754
for an assumption that matches the rule's first premise, as usual.  With
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   755
\isa{ssubst} the effect is to find, use and delete an equality 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   756
assumption.
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   757
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   758
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   759
\subsection{Unification and Its Pitfalls}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   760
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   761
Higher-order unification can be tricky.  Here is an example, which you may
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   762
want to skip on your first reading:
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   763
\begin{isabelle}
11179
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   764
\isacommand{lemma}\ "\isasymlbrakk x\ =\
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   765
f\ x;\ triple\ (f\ x)\ (f\ x)\ x\isasymrbrakk\
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   766
\isasymLongrightarrow\ triple\ x\ x\ x"\isanewline
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   767
\isacommand{apply}\ (erule\ ssubst)\isanewline
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   768
\isacommand{back}\isanewline
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   769
\isacommand{back}\isanewline
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   770
\isacommand{back}\isanewline
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   771
\isacommand{back}\isanewline
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   772
\isacommand{apply}\ assumption\isanewline
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   773
\isacommand{done}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   774
\end{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   775
%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   776
By default, Isabelle tries to substitute for all the 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   777
occurrences.  Applying \isa{erule\ ssubst} yields this subgoal:
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   778
\begin{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   779
\ 1.\ triple\ (f\ x)\ (f\ x)\ x\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ triple\ (f\ x)\ (f\ x)\ (f\ x)
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   780
\end{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   781
The substitution should have been done in the first two occurrences 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   782
of~\isa{x} only. Isabelle has gone too far. The \isa{back} 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   783
method allows us to reject this possibility and get a new one: 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   784
\begin{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   785
\ 1.\ triple\ (f\ x)\ (f\ x)\ x\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ triple\ x\ (f\ x)\ (f\ x)
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   786
\end{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   787
%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   788
Now Isabelle has left the first occurrence of~\isa{x} alone. That is 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   789
promising but it is not the desired combination. So we use \isa{back} 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   790
again:
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   791
\begin{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   792
\ 1.\ triple\ (f\ x)\ (f\ x)\ x\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ triple\ (f\ x)\ x\ (f\ x)
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   793
\end{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   794
%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   795
This also is wrong, so we use \isa{back} again: 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   796
\begin{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   797
\ 1.\ triple\ (f\ x)\ (f\ x)\ x\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ triple\ x\ x\ (f\ x)
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   798
\end{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   799
%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   800
And this one is wrong too. Looking carefully at the series 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   801
of alternatives, we see a binary countdown with reversed bits: 111,
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   802
011, 101, 001.  Invoke \isa{back} again: 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   803
\begin{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   804
\ 1.\ triple\ (f\ x)\ (f\ x)\ x\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ triple\ (f\ x)\ (f\ x)\ x%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   805
\end{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   806
At last, we have the right combination!  This goal follows by assumption.%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   807
\index{unification|)}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   808
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   809
\subsection{Keeping Unification under Control}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   810
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   811
The previous example showed that unification can do strange things with
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   812
function variables.  We were forced to select the right unifier using the
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   813
\isa{back} command.  That is all right during exploration, but \isa{back}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   814
should never appear in the final version of a proof.  You can eliminate the
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   815
need for \isa{back} by giving Isabelle less freedom when you apply a rule.
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   816
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   817
One way to constrain the inference is by joining two methods in a 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   818
\isacommand{apply} command. Isabelle  applies the first method and then the
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   819
second. If the second method  fails then Isabelle automatically backtracks.
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   820
This process continues until  the first method produces an output that the
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   821
second method can  use. We get a one-line proof of our example: 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   822
\begin{isabelle}
11179
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   823
\isacommand{lemma}\ "\isasymlbrakk x\ =\ f\ x;\ triple\ (f\ x)\ (f\ x)\ x\isasymrbrakk\
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   824
\isasymLongrightarrow\ triple\ x\ x\ x"\isanewline
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   825
\isacommand{apply}\ (erule\ ssubst,\ assumption)\isanewline
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   826
\isacommand{done}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   827
\end{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   828
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   829
\noindent
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   830
The \isacommand{by} command works too, since it backtracks when
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   831
proving subgoals by assumption:
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   832
\begin{isabelle}
11179
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   833
\isacommand{lemma}\ "\isasymlbrakk x\ =\ f\ x;\ triple\ (f\ x)\ (f\ x)\ x\isasymrbrakk\
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   834
\isasymLongrightarrow\ triple\ x\ x\ x"\isanewline
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   835
\isacommand{by}\ (erule\ ssubst)
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   836
\end{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   837
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   838
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   839
The most general way to constrain unification is 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   840
by instantiating variables in the rule.  The method \isa{rule_tac} is
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   841
similar to \isa{rule}, but it
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   842
makes some of the rule's variables  denote specified terms.  
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   843
Also available are {\isa{drule_tac}}  and \isa{erule_tac}.  Here we need
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   844
\isa{erule_tac} since above we used \isa{erule}.
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   845
\begin{isabelle}
11179
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   846
\isacommand{lemma}\ "\isasymlbrakk x\ =\ f\ x;\ triple\ (f\ x)\ (f\ x)\ x\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ triple\ x\ x\ x"\isanewline
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
   847
\isacommand{by}\ (erule_tac\ P = "\isasymlambda u.\ triple\ u\ u\ x"\ 
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   848
\isakeyword{in}\ ssubst)
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   849
\end{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   850
%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   851
To specify a desired substitution 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   852
requires instantiating the variable \isa{?P} with a $\lambda$-expression. 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   853
The bound variable occurrences in \isa{{\isasymlambda}u.\ P\ u\
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   854
u\ x} indicate that the first two arguments have to be substituted, leaving
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   855
the third unchanged.  With this instantiation, backtracking is neither necessary
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   856
nor possible.
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   857
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   858
An alternative to \isa{rule_tac} is to use \isa{rule} with the
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   859
\isa{of} directive, described in \S\ref{sec:forward} below.   An
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   860
advantage  of \isa{rule_tac} is that the instantiations may refer to 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   861
\isasymAnd-bound variables in the current subgoal.%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   862
\index{substitution|)}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   863
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   864
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   865
\section{Quantifiers}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   866
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   867
\index{quantifiers|(}\index{quantifiers!universal|(}%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   868
Quantifiers require formalizing syntactic substitution and the notion of 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   869
\emph{arbitrary value}.  Consider the universal quantifier.  In a logic
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   870
book, its introduction  rule looks like this: 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   871
\[ \infer{\forall x.\,P}{P} \]
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   872
Typically, a proviso written in English says that $x$ must not
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   873
occur in the assumptions.  This proviso guarantees that $x$ can be regarded as
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   874
arbitrary, since it has not been assumed to satisfy any special conditions. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   875
Isabelle's  underlying formalism, called the
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   876
\emph{meta-logic}, eliminates the  need for English.  It provides its own universal
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   877
quantifier (\isasymAnd) to express the notion of an arbitrary value.  We have
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   878
already seen  another symbol of the meta-logic, namely
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   879
\isa\isasymLongrightarrow, which expresses  inference rules and the treatment of
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   880
assumptions. The only other  symbol in the meta-logic is \isa\isasymequiv, which
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   881
can be used to define constants.
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   882
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   883
\subsection{The Universal Introduction Rule}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   884
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   885
Returning to the universal quantifier, we find that having a similar quantifier
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   886
as part of the meta-logic makes the introduction rule trivial to express:
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   887
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   888
(\isasymAnd x.\ ?P\ x)\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ {\isasymforall}x.\ ?P\ x\rulename{allI}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   889
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   890
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   891
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   892
The following trivial proof demonstrates how the universal introduction 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   893
rule works. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   894
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   895
\isacommand{lemma}\ "{\isasymforall}x.\ P\ x\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ P\ x"\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   896
\isacommand{apply}\ (rule\ allI)\isanewline
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   897
\isacommand{by}\ (rule\ impI)
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   898
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   899
The first step invokes the rule by applying the method \isa{rule allI}. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   900
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   901
\ 1.\ \isasymAnd x.\ P\ x\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ P\ x
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   902
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   903
Note  that the resulting proof state has a bound variable,
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   904
namely~\isa{x}.  The rule has replaced the universal quantifier of
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   905
higher-order  logic by Isabelle's meta-level quantifier.  Our goal is to
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   906
prove
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   907
\isa{P\ x\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ P\ x} for arbitrary~\isa{x}; it is 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   908
an implication, so we apply the corresponding introduction rule (\isa{impI}). 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   909
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   910
\ 1.\ \isasymAnd x.\ P\ x\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ P\ x
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   911
\end{isabelle}
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   912
This last subgoal is implicitly proved by assumption. 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   913
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   914
\subsection{The Universal Elimination Rule}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   915
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   916
Now consider universal elimination. In a logic text, 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   917
the rule looks like this: 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   918
\[ \infer{P[t/x]}{\forall x.\,P} \]
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   919
The conclusion is $P$ with $t$ substituted for the variable~$x$.  
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   920
Isabelle expresses substitution using a function variable: 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   921
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   922
{\isasymforall}x.\ ?P\ x\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?P\ ?x\rulename{spec}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   923
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   924
This destruction rule takes a 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   925
universally quantified formula and removes the quantifier, replacing 
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   926
the bound variable \isa{x} by the schematic variable \isa{?x}.  Recall that a
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   927
schematic variable starts with a question mark and acts as a
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   928
placeholder: it can be replaced by any term.  
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   929
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   930
The universal elimination rule is also
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   931
available in the standard elimination format.  Like \isa{conjE}, it never
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   932
appears in logic books:
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   933
\begin{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   934
\isasymlbrakk \isasymforall x.\ ?P\ x;\ ?P\ ?x\ \isasymLongrightarrow \ ?R\isasymrbrakk \ \isasymLongrightarrow \ ?R%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   935
\rulename{allE}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   936
\end{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   937
The methods \isa{drule~spec} and \isa{erule~allE} do precisely the
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   938
same inference.
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   939
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   940
To see how $\forall$-elimination works, let us derive a rule about reducing 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   941
the scope of a universal quantifier.  In mathematical notation we write
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   942
\[ \infer{P\imp\forall x.\,Q}{\forall x.\,P\imp Q} \]
10978
5eebea8f359f *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10971
diff changeset
   943
with the proviso ``$x$ not free in~$P$.''  Isabelle's treatment of
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   944
substitution makes the proviso unnecessary.  The conclusion is expressed as
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   945
\isa{P\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   946
\isasymlongrightarrow\ ({\isasymforall}x.\ Q\ x)}. No substitution for the
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   947
variable \isa{P} can introduce a dependence upon~\isa{x}: that would be a
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   948
bound variable capture.  Let us walk through the proof.
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   949
\begin{isabelle}
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   950
\isacommand{lemma}\ "(\isasymforall x.\ P\ \isasymlongrightarrow \ Q\ x)\
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   951
\isasymLongrightarrow \ P\ \isasymlongrightarrow \ (\isasymforall x.\ Q\
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   952
x)"
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   953
\end{isabelle}
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   954
First we apply implies introduction (\isa{impI}), 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   955
which moves the \isa{P} from the conclusion to the assumptions. Then 
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   956
we apply universal introduction (\isa{allI}).  
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   957
\begin{isabelle}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   958
\isacommand{apply}\ (rule\ impI,\ rule\ allI)\isanewline
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   959
\ 1.\ \isasymAnd x.\ \isasymlbrakk{\isasymforall}x.\ P\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ Q\
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
   960
x;\ P\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ Q\ x
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   961
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   962
As before, it replaces the HOL 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   963
quantifier by a meta-level quantifier, producing a subgoal that 
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   964
binds the variable~\isa{x}.  The leading bound variables
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   965
(here \isa{x}) and the assumptions (here \isa{{\isasymforall}x.\ P\
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   966
\isasymlongrightarrow\ Q\ x} and \isa{P}) form the \emph{context} for the
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   967
conclusion, here \isa{Q\ x}.  Subgoals inherit the context,
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   968
although assumptions can be added or deleted (as we saw
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   969
earlier), while rules such as \isa{allI} add bound variables.
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   970
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   971
Now, to reason from the universally quantified 
10967
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
   972
assumption, we apply the elimination rule using the \isa{drule} 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   973
method.  This rule is called \isa{spec} because it specializes a universal formula
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   974
to a particular term.
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   975
\begin{isabelle}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   976
\isacommand{apply}\ (drule\ spec)\isanewline
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   977
\ 1.\ \isasymAnd x.\ \isasymlbrakk P;\ P\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ Q\ (?x2\
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
   978
x)\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ Q\ x
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   979
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   980
Observe how the context has changed.  The quantified formula is gone,
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   981
replaced by a new assumption derived from its body.  Informally, we have
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   982
removed the quantifier.  The quantified variable
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
   983
has been replaced by the curious term 
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   984
\isa{?x2~x}; it acts as a placeholder that may be replaced 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   985
by any term that can be built from~\isa{x}.  (Formally, \isa{?x2} is an
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   986
unknown of function type, applied to the argument~\isa{x}.)  This new assumption is
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   987
an implication, so we can  use \emph{modus ponens} on it, which concludes
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   988
the proof. 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   989
\begin{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   990
\isacommand{by}\ (drule\ mp)
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   991
\end{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   992
Let us take a closer look at this last step.  \emph{Modus ponens} yields
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   993
two subgoals: one where we prove the antecedent (in this case \isa{P}) and
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   994
one where we may assume the consequent.  Both of these subgoals are proved
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   995
by the
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   996
\isa{assumption} method, which is implicit in the
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   997
\isacommand{by} command.  Replacing the \isacommand{by} command by 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   998
\isa{\isacommand{apply} (drule\ mp, assumption)} would have left one last
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
   999
subgoal:
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1000
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1001
\ 1.\ \isasymAnd x.\ \isasymlbrakk P;\ Q\ (?x2\ x)\isasymrbrakk\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1002
\isasymLongrightarrow\ Q\ x
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1003
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1004
The consequent is \isa{Q} applied to that placeholder.  It may be replaced by any
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1005
term built from~\isa{x}, and here 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1006
it should simply be~\isa{x}.  The assumption need not
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1007
be identical to the conclusion, provided the two formulas are unifiable.%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1008
\index{quantifiers!universal|)}  
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1009
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1010
10967
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1011
\subsection{Renaming an Assumption: {\tt\slshape rename_tac}}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1012
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1013
\index{assumptions!renaming|(}\index{*rename_tac|(}%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1014
When you apply a rule such as \isa{allI}, the quantified variable
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1015
becomes a new bound variable of the new subgoal.  Isabelle tries to avoid
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1016
changing its name, but sometimes it has to choose a new name in order to
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1017
avoid a clash.  Here is a contrived example:
10967
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1018
\begin{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1019
\isacommand{lemma}\ "x\ <\ y\ \isasymLongrightarrow \ \isasymforall x\ y.\ P\ x\
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1020
(f\ y)"\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1021
\isacommand{apply}\ intro\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1022
\ 1.\ \isasymAnd xa\ ya.\ x\ <\ y\ \isasymLongrightarrow \ P\ xa\ (f\ ya)
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1023
\end{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1024
%
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1025
The names \isa{x} and \isa{y} were already in use, so the new bound variables are
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1026
called \isa{xa} and~\isa{ya}.  You can rename them by invoking \isa{rename_tac}:
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1027
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1028
\begin{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1029
\isacommand{apply}\ (rename_tac\ v\ w)\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1030
\ 1.\ \isasymAnd v\ w.\ x\ <\ y\ \isasymLongrightarrow \ P\ v\ (f\ w)
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1031
\end{isabelle}
10978
5eebea8f359f *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10971
diff changeset
  1032
Recall that \isa{rule_tac}\index{*rule_tac!and renaming} instantiates a
10967
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1033
theorem with specified terms.  These terms may involve the goal's bound
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1034
variables, but beware of referring to  variables
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1035
like~\isa{xa}.  A future change to your theories could change the set of names
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1036
produced at top level, so that \isa{xa} changes to~\isa{xb} or reverts to~\isa{x}.
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1037
It is safer to rename automatically-generated variables before mentioning them.
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1038
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1039
If the subgoal has more bound variables than there are names given to
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1040
\isa{rename_tac}, the rightmost ones are renamed.%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1041
\index{assumptions!renaming|)}\index{*rename_tac|)}
10967
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1042
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1043
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1044
\subsection{Reusing an Assumption: {\tt\slshape frule}}
11179
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
  1045
\label{sec:frule}
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1046
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1047
\index{assumptions!reusing|(}\index{*frule|(}%
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1048
Note that \isa{drule spec} removes the universal quantifier and --- as
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1049
usual with elimination rules --- discards the original formula.  Sometimes, a
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1050
universal formula has to be kept so that it can be used again.  Then we use a new
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1051
method: \isa{frule}.  It acts like \isa{drule} but copies rather than replaces
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1052
the selected assumption.  The \isa{f} is for \emph{forward}.
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1053
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1054
In this example, going from \isa{P\ a} to \isa{P(h(h~a))}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1055
requires two uses of the quantified assumption, one for each~\isa{h} being
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1056
affixed to the term~\isa{a}.
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1057
\begin{isabelle}
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1058
\isacommand{lemma}\ "\isasymlbrakk{\isasymforall}x.\ P\ x\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ P\ (h\ x);
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1059
\ P\ a\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ P(h\ (h\ a))"
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1060
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1061
%
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1062
Examine the subgoal left by \isa{frule}:
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1063
\begin{isabelle}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1064
\isacommand{apply}\ (frule\ spec)\isanewline
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1065
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk{\isasymforall}x.\ P\ x\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ P\ (h\ x);\ P\ a;\ P\ ?x\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ P\ (h\ ?x)\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ P\ (h\ (h\ a))
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1066
\end{isabelle}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1067
It is what \isa{drule} would have left except that the quantified
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1068
assumption is still present.  Next we apply \isa{mp} to the
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1069
implication and the assumption~\isa{P\ a}:
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1070
\begin{isabelle}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1071
\isacommand{apply}\ (drule\ mp,\ assumption)\isanewline
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1072
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk{\isasymforall}x.\ P\ x\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ P\ (h\ x);\ P\ a;\ P\ (h\ a)\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ P\ (h\ (h\ a))
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1073
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1074
%
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1075
We have created the assumption \isa{P(h\ a)}, which is progress.  To
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1076
continue the proof, we apply \isa{spec} again.  We shall not need it
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1077
again, so we can use
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1078
\isa{drule}.
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1079
\begin{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1080
\isacommand{apply}\ (drule\ spec)\isanewline
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1081
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk P\ a;\ P\ (h\ a);\ P\ ?x2\ 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1082
\isasymlongrightarrow \ P\ (h\ ?x2)\isasymrbrakk \ \isasymLongrightarrow \
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1083
P\ (h\ (h\ a))
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1084
\end{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1085
%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1086
The new assumption bridges the gap between \isa{P(h\ a)} and \isa{P(h(h\ a))}.
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1087
\begin{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1088
\isacommand{by}\ (drule\ mp)
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1089
\end{isabelle}
10854
d1ff1ff5c5ad case_tac on bools
paulson
parents: 10848
diff changeset
  1090
d1ff1ff5c5ad case_tac on bools
paulson
parents: 10848
diff changeset
  1091
\medskip
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1092
\emph{A final remark}.  Replacing this \isacommand{by} command with
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1093
\begin{isabelle}
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1094
\isacommand{apply}\ (drule\ mp,\ assumption)
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1095
\end{isabelle}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1096
would not work: it would add a second copy of \isa{P(h~a)} instead
10854
d1ff1ff5c5ad case_tac on bools
paulson
parents: 10848
diff changeset
  1097
of the desired assumption, \isa{P(h(h~a))}.  The \isacommand{by}
d1ff1ff5c5ad case_tac on bools
paulson
parents: 10848
diff changeset
  1098
command forces Isabelle to backtrack until it finds the correct one.
d1ff1ff5c5ad case_tac on bools
paulson
parents: 10848
diff changeset
  1099
Alternatively, we could have used the \isacommand{apply} command and bundled the
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1100
\isa{drule mp} with \emph{two} calls of \isa{assumption}.%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1101
\index{assumptions!reusing|)}\index{*frule|)}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1102
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1103
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1104
\subsection{The Existential Quantifier}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1105
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1106
\index{quantifiers!existential|(}%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1107
The concepts just presented also apply
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1108
to the existential quantifier, whose introduction rule looks like this in
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1109
Isabelle: 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1110
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1111
?P\ ?x\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ {\isasymexists}x.\ ?P\ x\rulename{exI}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1112
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1113
If we can exhibit some $x$ such that $P(x)$ is true, then $\exists x.
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1114
P(x)$ is also true.  It is a dual of the universal elimination rule, and
10971
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
  1115
logic texts present it using the same notation for substitution.
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
  1116
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
  1117
The existential
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1118
elimination rule looks like this
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1119
in a logic text: 
10971
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
  1120
\[ \infer{Q}{\exists x.\,P & \infer*{Q}{[P]}} \]
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1121
%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1122
It looks like this in Isabelle: 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1123
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1124
\isasymlbrakk{\isasymexists}x.\ ?P\ x;\ \isasymAnd x.\ ?P\ x\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?Q\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?Q\rulename{exE}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1125
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1126
%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1127
Given an existentially quantified theorem and some
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1128
formula $Q$ to prove, it creates a new assumption by removing the quantifier.  As with
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1129
the universal introduction  rule, the textbook version imposes a proviso on the
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1130
quantified variable, which Isabelle expresses using its meta-logic.  Note that it is
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1131
enough to have a universal quantifier in the meta-logic; we do not need an existential
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1132
quantifier to be built in as well.
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1133
 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1134
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1135
\begin{exercise}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1136
Prove the lemma
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1137
\[ \exists x.\, P\conj Q(x)\Imp P\conj(\exists x.\, Q(x)). \]
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1138
\emph{Hint}: the proof is similar 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1139
to the one just above for the universal quantifier. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1140
\end{exercise}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1141
\index{quantifiers|)}\index{quantifiers!existential|)}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1142
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1143
10887
7fb42b97413a the \\epsilon character causes font errors in a section title
paulson
parents: 10854
diff changeset
  1144
\section{Hilbert's Epsilon-Operator}
10971
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
  1145
\label{sec:SOME}
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1146
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1147
\index{Hilbert's epsilon-operator|(}%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1148
HOL provides Hilbert's $\varepsilon$-operator.  The term $\varepsilon x.
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1149
P(x)$ denotes some $x$ such that $P(x)$ is true, provided such a value
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1150
exists.  In \textsc{ascii}, we write \isa{SOME} for the Greek
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1151
letter~$\varepsilon$.
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1152
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1153
\begin{warn}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1154
Hilbert's $\varepsilon$-operator can be hard to reason about.  New users
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1155
should try to avoid it.  Fortunately, situations that require it are rare.
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1156
\end{warn}
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1157
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1158
\subsection{Definite Descriptions}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1159
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1160
\index{descriptions!definite}%
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1161
The main use of \hbox{\isa{SOME\ x.\ P\ x}} is as a \textbf{definite
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1162
description}: when \isa{P} is satisfied by a unique value,~\isa{a}. 
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1163
We reason using this rule:
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1164
\begin{isabelle}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1165
\isasymlbrakk P\ a;\ \isasymAnd x.\ P\ x\ \isasymLongrightarrow \ x\ =\ a\isasymrbrakk \ 
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1166
\isasymLongrightarrow \ (SOME\ x.\ P\ x)\ =\ a%
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1167
\rulename{some_equality}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1168
\end{isabelle}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1169
For instance, we can define the
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1170
cardinality of a finite set~$A$ to be that
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1171
$n$ such that $A$ is in one-to-one correspondence with $\{1,\ldots,n\}$.  We can then
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1172
prove that the cardinality of the empty set is zero (since $n=0$ satisfies the
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1173
description) and proceed to prove other facts.
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1174
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1175
A more challenging example illustrates how Isabelle/HOL defines the least-number
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1176
operator, which denotes the least \isa{x} satisfying~\isa{P}:
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1177
\begin{isabelle}
11179
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
  1178
(LEAST\ x.\ P\ x)\ = (SOME\ x.\ P\ x\ \isasymand \ (\isasymforall y.\
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
  1179
P\ y\ \isasymlongrightarrow \ x\ \isasymle \ y))
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1180
\end{isabelle}
11179
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
  1181
%
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
  1182
Let us prove the counterpart of \isa{some_equality} for \isa{LEAST}\@.
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
  1183
The first step merely unfolds the definitions (\isa{LeastM} is a
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
  1184
auxiliary operator):
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1185
\begin{isabelle}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1186
\isacommand{theorem}\ Least_equality:\isanewline
11179
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
  1187
\ \ \ \ \ "\isasymlbrakk P\ (k::nat);\ \ \isasymforall x.\ P\ x\ \isasymlongrightarrow \ k\ \isasymle \ x\isasymrbrakk \ \isasymLongrightarrow \ (LEAST\ x.\ P\ x)\ =\ k"\isanewline
11155
603df40ef1e9 Least_def now refers to LeastM
paulson
parents: 11080
diff changeset
  1188
\isacommand{apply}\ (simp\ add:\ Least_def\ LeastM_def)\isanewline
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1189
%\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk P\ k;\ \isasymforall x.\ P\ x\ \isasymlongrightarrow \ k\
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1190
%\isasymle \ x\isasymrbrakk \isanewline
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1191
%\ \ \ \ \isasymLongrightarrow \ (SOME\ x.\ P\ x\ \isasymand \ (\isasymforall y.\ P\ y\ \isasymlongrightarrow \ x\ \isasymle \ y))\ =\ k%
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1192
\isacommand{apply}\ (rule\ some_equality)\isanewline
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1193
\isanewline
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1194
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk P\ k;\ \isasymforall x.\ P\ x\ \isasymlongrightarrow \ k\
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1195
\isasymle \ x\isasymrbrakk \ \isasymLongrightarrow \ P\ k\ \isasymand \
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1196
(\isasymforall y.\ P\ y\ \isasymlongrightarrow \ k\ \isasymle \ y)\isanewline
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1197
\ 2.\ \isasymAnd x.\ \isasymlbrakk P\ k;\ \isasymforall x.\ P\ x\ \isasymlongrightarrow \ k\ \isasymle \ x;\ P\ x\ \isasymand \ (\isasymforall y.\ P\ y\ \isasymlongrightarrow \ x\ \isasymle \ y)\isasymrbrakk \isanewline
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1198
\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \isasymLongrightarrow \ x\ =\ k%
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1199
\end{isabelle}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1200
As always with \isa{some_equality}, we must show existence and
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1201
uniqueness of the claimed solution,~\isa{k}.  Existence, the first
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1202
subgoal, is trivial.  Uniqueness, the second subgoal, follows by antisymmetry:
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1203
\begin{isabelle}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1204
\isasymlbrakk x\ \isasymle \ y;\ y\ \isasymle \ x\isasymrbrakk \ \isasymLongrightarrow \ x\ =\ y%
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1205
\rulename{order_antisym}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1206
\end{isabelle}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1207
The assumptions imply both \isa{k~\isasymle~x} and \isa{x~\isasymle~k}.  One call
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1208
to \isa{auto} does it all:
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1209
\begin{isabelle}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1210
\isacommand{by}\ (auto\ intro:\ order_antisym)
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1211
\end{isabelle}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1212
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1213
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1214
\subsection{Indefinite Descriptions}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1215
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1216
\index{descriptions!indefinite}%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1217
Occasionally, \hbox{\isa{SOME\ x.\ P\ x}} serves as an \emph{indefinite
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1218
description}, when it makes an arbitrary selection from the values
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1219
satisfying~\isa{P}\@.  Here is the definition
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1220
of~\isa{inv},\index{*inv (constant)} which expresses inverses of functions:
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1221
\begin{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1222
inv\ f\ \isasymequiv \ \isasymlambda y.\ SOME\ x.\ f\ x\ =\ y%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1223
\rulename{inv_def}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1224
\end{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1225
The inverse of \isa{f}, when applied to \isa{y}, returns some {x} such that
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1226
\isa{f~x~=~y}.  For example, we can prove \isa{inv~Suc} really is the inverse
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1227
of the \isa{Suc} function 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1228
\begin{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1229
\isacommand{lemma}\ "inv\ Suc\ (Suc\ n)\ =\ n"\isanewline
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1230
\isacommand{by}\ (simp\ add:\ inv_def)
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1231
\end{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1232
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1233
\noindent
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1234
The proof is a one-liner: the subgoal simplifies to a degenerate application of
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1235
\isa{SOME}, which is then erased.  In detail, the left-hand side simplifies
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1236
to \isa{SOME\ x.\ Suc\ x\ =\ Suc\ n}, then to \isa{SOME\ x.\ x\ =\ n} and
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1237
finally to~\isa{n}.  
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1238
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1239
We know nothing about what
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1240
\isa{inv~Suc} returns when applied to zero.  The proof above still treats
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1241
\isa{SOME} as a definite description, since it only reasons about
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1242
situations in which the value is  described uniquely.  To go further is
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1243
tricky and requires rules such as these:
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1244
\begin{isabelle}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1245
P\ x\ \isasymLongrightarrow \ P\ (SOME\ x.\ P\ x)
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1246
\rulename{someI}\isanewline
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1247
\isasymlbrakk P\ a;\ \isasymAnd x.\ P\ x\ \isasymLongrightarrow \ Q\
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1248
x\isasymrbrakk \ \isasymLongrightarrow \ Q\ (SOME\ x.\ P\ x)
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1249
\rulename{someI2}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1250
\end{isabelle}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1251
Rule \isa{someI} is basic (if anything satisfies \isa{P} then so does
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1252
\hbox{\isa{SOME\ x.\ P\ x}}).  Rule \isa{someI2} is easier to apply in a backward
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1253
proof.
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1254
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1255
\medskip
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1256
For example, let us prove the Axiom of Choice:
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1257
\begin{isabelle}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1258
\isacommand{theorem}\ axiom_of_choice:
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1259
\ "(\isasymforall x.\ \isasymexists y.\ P\ x\ y)\ \isasymLongrightarrow \
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1260
\isasymexists f.\ \isasymforall x.\ P\ x\ (f\ x)"\isanewline
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1261
\isacommand{apply}\ (rule\ exI,\ rule\ allI)\isanewline
10971
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
  1262
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1263
\ 1.\ \isasymAnd x.\ \isasymforall x.\ \isasymexists y.\ P\ x\ y\
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1264
\isasymLongrightarrow \ P\ x\ (?f\ x)
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1265
\end{isabelle}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1266
%
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1267
We have applied the introduction rules; now it is time to apply the elimination
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1268
rules.
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1269
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1270
\begin{isabelle}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1271
\isacommand{apply}\ (drule\ spec,\ erule\ exE)\isanewline
10971
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
  1272
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1273
\ 1.\ \isasymAnd x\ y.\ P\ (?x2\ x)\ y\ \isasymLongrightarrow \ P\ x\ (?f\ x)
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1274
\end{isabelle}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1275
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1276
\noindent
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1277
The rule \isa{someI} automatically instantiates
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1278
\isa{f} to \hbox{\isa{\isasymlambda x.\ SOME y.\ P\ x\ y}}, which is the choice
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1279
function.  It also instantiates \isa{?x2\ x} to \isa{x}.
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1280
\begin{isabelle}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1281
\isacommand{by}\ (rule\ someI)\isanewline
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1282
\end{isabelle}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1283
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1284
\subsubsection{Historical Note}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1285
The original purpose of Hilbert's $\varepsilon$-operator was to express an
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1286
existential destruction rule:
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1287
\[ \infer{P[(\varepsilon x. P) / \, x]}{\exists x.\,P} \]
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1288
This rule is seldom used for that purpose --- it can cause exponential
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1289
blow-up --- but it is occasionally used as an introduction rule
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1290
for~$\varepsilon$-operator.  Its name is HOL is \isa{someI_ex}.
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1291
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1292
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1293
\index{Hilbert's epsilon-operator|)}
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1294
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1295
\section{Some Proofs That Fail}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1296
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1297
\index{proofs!examples of failing|(}%
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1298
Most of the examples in this tutorial involve proving theorems.  But not every 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1299
conjecture is true, and it can be instructive to see how  
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1300
proofs fail. Here we attempt to prove a distributive law involving 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1301
the existential quantifier and conjunction. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1302
\begin{isabelle}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1303
\isacommand{lemma}\ "({\isasymexists}x.\ P\ x)\ \isasymand\ 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1304
({\isasymexists}x.\ Q\ x)\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ {\isasymexists}x.\ P\ x\
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1305
\isasymand\ Q\ x"
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1306
\end{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1307
The first steps are  routine.  We apply conjunction elimination to break
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1308
the assumption into two existentially quantified assumptions. 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1309
Applying existential elimination removes one of the quantifiers. 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1310
\begin{isabelle}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1311
\isacommand{apply}\ (erule\ conjE)\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1312
\isacommand{apply}\ (erule\ exE)\isanewline
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1313
\ 1.\ \isasymAnd x.\ \isasymlbrakk{\isasymexists}x.\ Q\ x;\ P\ x\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ {\isasymexists}x.\ P\ x\ \isasymand\ Q\ x
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1314
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1315
%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1316
When we remove the other quantifier, we get a different bound 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1317
variable in the subgoal.  (The name \isa{xa} is generated automatically.)
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1318
\begin{isabelle}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1319
\isacommand{apply}\ (erule\ exE)\isanewline
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1320
\ 1.\ \isasymAnd x\ xa.\ \isasymlbrakk P\ x;\ Q\ xa\isasymrbrakk\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1321
\isasymLongrightarrow\ {\isasymexists}x.\ P\ x\ \isasymand\ Q\ x
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1322
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1323
The proviso of the existential elimination rule has forced the variables to
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1324
differ: we can hardly expect two arbitrary values to be equal!  There is
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1325
no way to prove this subgoal.  Removing the
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1326
conclusion's existential quantifier yields two
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1327
identical placeholders, which can become  any term involving the variables \isa{x}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1328
and~\isa{xa}.  We need one to become \isa{x}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1329
and the other to become~\isa{xa}, but Isabelle requires all instances of a
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1330
placeholder to be identical. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1331
\begin{isabelle}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1332
\isacommand{apply}\ (rule\ exI)\isanewline
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1333
\isacommand{apply}\ (rule\ conjI)\isanewline
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1334
\ 1.\ \isasymAnd x\ xa.\ \isasymlbrakk P\ x;\ Q\ xa\isasymrbrakk\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1335
\isasymLongrightarrow\ P\ (?x3\ x\ xa)\isanewline
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1336
\ 2.\ \isasymAnd x\ xa.\ \isasymlbrakk P\ x;\ Q\ xa\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ Q\ (?x3\ x\ xa)
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1337
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1338
We can prove either subgoal 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1339
using the \isa{assumption} method.  If we prove the first one, the placeholder
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1340
changes into~\isa{x}. 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1341
\begin{isabelle}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1342
\ \isacommand{apply}\ assumption\isanewline
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1343
\ 1.\ \isasymAnd x\ xa.\ \isasymlbrakk P\ x;\ Q\ xa\isasymrbrakk\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1344
\isasymLongrightarrow\ Q\ x
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1345
\end{isabelle}
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1346
We are left with a subgoal that cannot be proved.  Applying the \isa{assumption}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1347
method results in an error message:
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1348
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1349
*** empty result sequence -- proof command failed
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1350
\end{isabelle}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1351
When interacting with Isabelle via the shell interface,
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1352
you can abandon a proof using the \isacommand{oops} command.
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1353
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1354
\medskip 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1355
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1356
Here is another abortive proof, illustrating the interaction between 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1357
bound variables and unknowns.  
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1358
If $R$ is a reflexive relation, 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1359
is there an $x$ such that $R\,x\,y$ holds for all $y$?  Let us see what happens when
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1360
we attempt to prove it. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1361
\begin{isabelle}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1362
\isacommand{lemma}\ "\isasymforall \ y.\ R\ y\ y\ \isasymLongrightarrow 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1363
\ \isasymexists x.\ \isasymforall \ y.\ R\ x\ y"
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1364
\end{isabelle}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1365
First,  we remove the existential quantifier. The new proof state has  an
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1366
unknown, namely~\isa{?x}. 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1367
\begin{isabelle}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1368
\isacommand{apply}\ (rule\ exI)\isanewline
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1369
\ 1.\ \isasymforall y.\ R\ y\ y\ \isasymLongrightarrow \ \isasymforall y.\ R\ ?x\ y%
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1370
\end{isabelle}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1371
It looks like we can just apply \isa{assumption}, but it fails.  Isabelle
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1372
refuses to substitute \isa{y}, a bound variable, for~\isa{?x}; that would be
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1373
a bound variable capture.  We can still try to finish the proof in some
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1374
other way. We remove the universal quantifier  from the conclusion, moving
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1375
the bound variable~\isa{y} into the subgoal.  But note that it is still
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1376
bound!
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1377
\begin{isabelle}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1378
\isacommand{apply}\ (rule\ allI)\isanewline
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1379
\ 1.\ \isasymAnd y.\ \isasymforall y.\ R\ y\ y\ \isasymLongrightarrow \ R\ ?x\ y%
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1380
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1381
Finally, we try to apply our reflexivity assumption.  We obtain a 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1382
new assumption whose identical placeholders may be replaced by 
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1383
any term involving~\isa{y}. 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1384
\begin{isabelle}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1385
\isacommand{apply}\ (drule\ spec)\isanewline
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1386
\ 1.\ \isasymAnd y.\ R\ (?z2\ y)\ (?z2\ y)\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ R\ ?x\ y
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1387
\end{isabelle}
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1388
This subgoal can only be proved by putting \isa{y} for all the placeholders,
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1389
making the assumption and conclusion become \isa{R\ y\ y}.  Isabelle can
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1390
replace \isa{?z2~y} by \isa{y}; this involves instantiating
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1391
\isa{?z2} to the identity function.  But, just as two steps earlier,
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1392
Isabelle refuses to substitute~\isa{y} for~\isa{?x}.
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1393
This example is typical of how Isabelle enforces sound quantifier reasoning. 
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1394
\index{proofs!examples of failing|)}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1395
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1396
\section{Proving Theorems Using the {\tt\slshape blast} Method}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1397
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1398
\index{*blast (method)|(}%
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1399
It is hard to prove substantial theorems using the methods 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1400
described above. A proof may be dozens or hundreds of steps long.  You 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1401
may need to search among different ways of proving certain 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1402
subgoals. Often a choice that proves one subgoal renders another 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1403
impossible to prove.  There are further complications that we have not
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1404
discussed, concerning negation and disjunction.  Isabelle's
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1405
\emph{classical reasoner} is a family of tools that perform such
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1406
proofs automatically.  The most important of these is the 
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1407
\isa{blast} method. 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1408
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1409
In this section, we shall first see how to use the classical 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1410
reasoner in its default mode and then how to insert additional 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1411
rules, enabling it to work in new problem domains. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1412
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1413
 We begin with examples from pure predicate logic. The following 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1414
example is known as Andrew's challenge. Peter Andrews designed 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1415
it to be hard to prove by automatic means.%
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1416
\footnote{It is particularly hard for a resolution prover.  The
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1417
nested biconditionals cause a combinatorial explosion in the conversion to
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1418
clause form.  Pelletier~\cite{pelletier86} describes it and many other
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1419
problems for automatic theorem provers.} 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1420
However, the
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1421
\isa{blast} method proves it in a fraction  of a second. 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1422
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1423
\isacommand{lemma}\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1424
"(({\isasymexists}x.\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1425
{\isasymforall}y.\
10301
paulson
parents: 10295
diff changeset
  1426
p(x){=}p(y))\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1427
=\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1428
(({\isasymexists}x.\
10301
paulson
parents: 10295
diff changeset
  1429
q(x))=({\isasymforall}y.\
paulson
parents: 10295
diff changeset
  1430
p(y))))\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1431
\ \ =\ \ \ \ \isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1432
\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1433
(({\isasymexists}x.\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1434
{\isasymforall}y.\
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1435
q(x){=}q(y))\ =\ (({\isasymexists}x.\ p(x))=({\isasymforall}y.\ q(y))))"\isanewline
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1436
\isacommand{by}\ blast
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1437
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1438
The next example is a logic problem composed by Lewis Carroll. 
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1439
The \isa{blast} method finds it trivial. Moreover, it turns out 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1440
that not all of the assumptions are necessary. We can easily 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1441
experiment with variations of this formula and see which ones 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1442
can be proved. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1443
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1444
\isacommand{lemma}\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1445
"({\isasymforall}x.\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1446
honest(x)\ \isasymand\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1447
industrious(x)\ \isasymlongrightarrow\
10301
paulson
parents: 10295
diff changeset
  1448
healthy(x))\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1449
\isasymand\ \ \isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1450
\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \isasymnot\ ({\isasymexists}x.\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1451
grocer(x)\ \isasymand\
10301
paulson
parents: 10295
diff changeset
  1452
healthy(x))\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1453
\isasymand\ \isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1454
\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ ({\isasymforall}x.\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1455
industrious(x)\ \isasymand\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1456
grocer(x)\ \isasymlongrightarrow\
10301
paulson
parents: 10295
diff changeset
  1457
honest(x))\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1458
\isasymand\ \isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1459
\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ ({\isasymforall}x.\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1460
cyclist(x)\ \isasymlongrightarrow\
10301
paulson
parents: 10295
diff changeset
  1461
industrious(x))\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1462
\isasymand\ \isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1463
\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ ({\isasymforall}x.\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1464
{\isasymnot}healthy(x)\ \isasymand\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1465
cyclist(x)\ \isasymlongrightarrow\
10301
paulson
parents: 10295
diff changeset
  1466
{\isasymnot}honest(x))\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1467
\ \isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1468
\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \isasymlongrightarrow\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1469
({\isasymforall}x.\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1470
grocer(x)\ \isasymlongrightarrow\
10301
paulson
parents: 10295
diff changeset
  1471
{\isasymnot}cyclist(x))"\isanewline
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1472
\isacommand{by}\ blast
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1473
\end{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1474
The \isa{blast} method is also effective for set theory, which is
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1475
described in the next chapter.  This formula below may look horrible, but
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1476
the \isa{blast} method proves it easily. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1477
\begin{isabelle}
10301
paulson
parents: 10295
diff changeset
  1478
\isacommand{lemma}\ "({\isasymUnion}i{\isasymin}I.\ A(i))\ \isasyminter\ ({\isasymUnion}j{\isasymin}J.\ B(j))\ =\isanewline
paulson
parents: 10295
diff changeset
  1479
\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ ({\isasymUnion}i{\isasymin}I.\ {\isasymUnion}j{\isasymin}J.\ A(i)\ \isasyminter\ B(j))"\isanewline
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1480
\isacommand{by}\ blast
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1481
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1482
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1483
Few subgoals are couched purely in predicate logic and set theory.
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1484
We can extend the scope of the classical reasoner by giving it new rules. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1485
Extending it effectively requires understanding the notions of
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1486
introduction, elimination and destruction rules.  Moreover, there is a
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1487
distinction between  safe and unsafe rules. A 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1488
\textbf{safe}\indexbold{safe rules} rule is one that can be applied 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1489
backwards without losing information; an
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1490
\textbf{unsafe}\indexbold{unsafe rules} rule loses  information, perhaps
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1491
transforming the subgoal into one that cannot be proved.  The safe/unsafe
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1492
distinction affects the proof search: if a proof attempt fails, the
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1493
classical reasoner backtracks to the most recent unsafe rule application
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1494
and makes another choice. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1495
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1496
An important special case avoids all these complications.  A logical 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1497
equivalence, which in higher-order logic is an equality between 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1498
formulas, can be given to the classical 
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1499
reasoner and simplifier by using the attribute \isa{iff}.  You 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1500
should do so if the right hand side of the equivalence is  
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1501
simpler than the left-hand side.  
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1502
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1503
For example, here is a simple fact about list concatenation. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1504
The result of appending two lists is empty if and only if both 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1505
of the lists are themselves empty. Obviously, applying this equivalence 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1506
will result in a simpler goal. When stating this lemma, we include 
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1507
the \isa{iff} attribute. Once we have proved the lemma, Isabelle 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1508
will make it known to the classical reasoner (and to the simplifier). 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1509
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1510
\isacommand{lemma}\
10854
d1ff1ff5c5ad case_tac on bools
paulson
parents: 10848
diff changeset
  1511
[iff]:\ "(xs{\isacharat}ys\ =\ [])\ =\
10971
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
  1512
(xs=[]\ \isasymand\ ys=[])"\isanewline
10854
d1ff1ff5c5ad case_tac on bools
paulson
parents: 10848
diff changeset
  1513
\isacommand{apply}\ (induct_tac\ xs)\isanewline
d1ff1ff5c5ad case_tac on bools
paulson
parents: 10848
diff changeset
  1514
\isacommand{apply}\ (simp_all)\isanewline
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1515
\isacommand{done}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1516
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1517
%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1518
This fact about multiplication is also appropriate for 
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1519
the \isa{iff} attribute:
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1520
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1521
(\mbox{?m}\ *\ \mbox{?n}\ =\ 0)\ =\ (\mbox{?m}\ =\ 0\ \isasymor\ \mbox{?n}\ =\ 0)
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1522
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1523
A product is zero if and only if one of the factors is zero.  The
10971
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
  1524
reasoning  involves a disjunction.  Proving new rules for
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1525
disjunctive reasoning  is hard, but translating to an actual disjunction
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1526
works:  the classical reasoner handles disjunction properly.
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1527
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1528
In more detail, this is how the \isa{iff} attribute works.  It converts
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1529
the equivalence $P=Q$ to a pair of rules: the introduction
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1530
rule $Q\Imp P$ and the destruction rule $P\Imp Q$.  It gives both to the
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1531
classical reasoner as safe rules, ensuring that all occurrences of $P$ in
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1532
a subgoal are replaced by~$Q$.  The simplifier performs the same
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1533
replacement, since \isa{iff} gives $P=Q$ to the
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1534
simplifier.  But classical reasoning is different from
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1535
simplification.  Simplification is deterministic: it applies rewrite rules
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1536
repeatedly, as long as possible, in order to \emph{transform} a goal.  Classical
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1537
reasoning uses search and backtracking in order to \emph{prove} a goal.%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1538
\index{*blast (method)|)}%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1539
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1540
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1541
\section{Other Classical Reasoning Methods}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1542
 
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1543
The \isa{blast} method is our main workhorse for proving theorems 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1544
automatically. Other components of the classical reasoner interact 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1545
with the simplifier. Still others perform classical reasoning 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1546
to a limited extent, giving the user fine control over the proof. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1547
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1548
Of the latter methods, the most useful is 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1549
\isa{clarify}.\indexbold{*clarify (method)}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1550
It performs 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1551
all obvious reasoning steps without splitting the goal into multiple 
10971
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
  1552
parts. It does not apply unsafe rules that could render the 
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
  1553
goal unprovable. By performing the obvious 
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1554
steps, \isa{clarify} lays bare the difficult parts of the problem, 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1555
where human intervention is necessary. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1556
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1557
For example, the following conjecture is false:
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1558
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1559
\isacommand{lemma}\ "({\isasymforall}x.\ P\ x)\ \isasymand\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1560
({\isasymexists}x.\ Q\ x)\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ ({\isasymforall}x.\ P\ x\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1561
\isasymand\ Q\ x)"\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1562
\isacommand{apply}\ clarify
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1563
\end{isabelle}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1564
The \isa{blast} method would simply fail, but \isa{clarify} presents 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1565
a subgoal that helps us see why we cannot continue the proof. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1566
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1567
\ 1.\ \isasymAnd x\ xa.\ \isasymlbrakk{\isasymforall}x.\ P\ x;\ Q\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1568
xa\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ P\ x\ \isasymand\ Q\ x
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1569
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1570
The proof must fail because the assumption \isa{Q\ xa} and conclusion \isa{Q\ x}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1571
refer to distinct bound variables.  To reach this state, \isa{clarify} applied
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1572
the introduction rules for \isa{\isasymlongrightarrow} and \isa{\isasymforall}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1573
and the elimination rule for ~\isa{\isasymand}.  It did not apply the introduction
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1574
rule for  \isa{\isasymand} because of its policy never to split goals.
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1575
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1576
Also available is \isa{clarsimp},\indexbold{*clarsimp (method)} 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1577
a method
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1578
that interleaves \isa{clarify} and \isa{simp}.  Also there is 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1579
\isa{safe},\indexbold{*safe (method)}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1580
which like \isa{clarify} performs obvious steps and even applies those that
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1581
split goals.
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1582
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1583
\indexbold{*force (method)}%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1584
The \isa{force} method applies the classical
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1585
reasoner and simplifier  to one goal. 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1586
Unless it can prove the goal, it fails. Contrast 
10546
b0ad1ed24cf6 replaced Eps by SOME
paulson
parents: 10399
diff changeset
  1587
that with the \isa{auto} method, which also combines classical reasoning 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1588
with simplification. The latter's purpose is to prove all the 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1589
easy subgoals and parts of subgoals. Unfortunately, it can produce 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1590
large numbers of new subgoals; also, since it proves some subgoals 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1591
and splits others, it obscures the structure of the proof tree. 
10546
b0ad1ed24cf6 replaced Eps by SOME
paulson
parents: 10399
diff changeset
  1592
The \isa{force} method does not have these drawbacks. Another 
b0ad1ed24cf6 replaced Eps by SOME
paulson
parents: 10399
diff changeset
  1593
difference: \isa{force} tries harder than {\isa{auto}} to prove 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1594
its goal, so it can take much longer to terminate.
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1595
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1596
Older components of the classical reasoner have largely been 
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1597
superseded by \isa{blast}, but they still have niche applications. 
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1598
Most important among these are \isa{fast} and \isa{best}. While \isa{blast} 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1599
searches for proofs using a built-in first-order reasoner, these 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1600
earlier methods search for proofs using standard Isabelle inference. 
11179
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
  1601
That makes them slower but enables them to work in the 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1602
presence of the more unusual features of Isabelle rules, such 
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1603
as type classes and function unknowns. For example, recall the introduction rule
10971
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
  1604
for Hilbert's $\varepsilon$-operator: 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1605
\begin{isabelle}
10546
b0ad1ed24cf6 replaced Eps by SOME
paulson
parents: 10399
diff changeset
  1606
?P\ ?x\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?P\ (SOME\ x.\ ?P x)
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1607
\rulename{someI}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1608
\end{isabelle}
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1609
%
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1610
The repeated occurrence of the variable \isa{?P} makes this rule tricky 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1611
to apply. Consider this contrived example: 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1612
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1613
\isacommand{lemma}\ "\isasymlbrakk Q\ a;\ P\ a\isasymrbrakk\isanewline
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1614
\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \,\isasymLongrightarrow\ P\ (SOME\ x.\ P\ x\ \isasymand\ Q\ x)\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1615
\isasymand\ Q\ (SOME\ x.\ P\ x\ \isasymand\ Q\ x)"\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1616
\isacommand{apply}\ (rule\ someI)
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1617
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1618
%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1619
We can apply rule \isa{someI} explicitly.  It yields the 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1620
following subgoal: 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1621
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1622
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk Q\ a;\ P\ a\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ P\ ?x\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1623
\isasymand\ Q\ ?x%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1624
\end{isabelle}
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1625
The proof from this point is trivial.  Could we have
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1626
proved the theorem with a single command? Not using \isa{blast}: it
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1627
cannot perform  the higher-order unification needed here.  The
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1628
\isa{fast}\indexbold{*fast (method)} method succeeds: 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1629
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1630
\isacommand{apply}\ (fast\ intro!:\ someI)
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1631
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1632
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1633
The \isa{best}\indexbold{*best (method)} method is similar to
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1634
\isa{fast} but it uses a  best-first search instead of depth-first search.
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1635
Accordingly,  it is slower but is less susceptible to divergence.
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1636
Transitivity  rules usually cause \isa{fast} to loop where often \isa{best} 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1637
can manage.
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1638
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1639
Here is a summary of the classical reasoning methods:
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1640
\begin{itemize}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1641
\item \isa{blast} works automatically and is the fastest
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1642
\item \isa{clarify}\indexbold{*clarify (method)} and 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1643
\isa{clarsimp}\indexbold{*clarsimp (method)}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1644
perform obvious steps without splitting the goal; 
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1645
\isa{safe}\indexbold{*safe (method)} even splits goals
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1646
\item \isa{force}\indexbold{*force (method)} uses classical reasoning
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1647
and simplification to prove a goal;
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1648
 \isa{auto} is similar but leaves what it cannot prove
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1649
\item \isa{fast} and \isa{best} are legacy methods that work well with rules involving
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1650
unusual features
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1651
\end{itemize}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1652
A table illustrates the relationships among four of these methods. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1653
\begin{center}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1654
\begin{tabular}{r|l|l|}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1655
           & no split   & split \\ \hline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1656
  no simp  & \isa{clarify}    & \isa{safe} \\ \hline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1657
     simp  & \isa{clarsimp}   & \isa{auto} \\ \hline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1658
\end{tabular}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1659
\end{center}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1660
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1661
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1662
\section{Directives for Forward Proof}\label{sec:forward}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1663
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1664
\index{forward proof|(}%
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1665
Forward proof means deriving new facts from old ones.  It is  the
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1666
most fundamental type of proof.  Backward proof, by working  from goals to
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1667
subgoals, can help us find a difficult proof.  But it is
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1668
not always the best way of presenting the proof so found.  Forward
10301
paulson
parents: 10295
diff changeset
  1669
proof is particularly good for reasoning from the general
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1670
to the specific.  For example, consider the following distributive law for
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1671
the greatest common divisor:
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1672
\[ k\times\gcd(m,n) = \gcd(k\times m,k\times n)\]
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1673
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1674
Putting $m=1$ we get (since $\gcd(1,n)=1$ and $k\times1=k$) 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1675
\[ k = \gcd(k,k\times n)\]
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1676
We have derived a new fact; if re-oriented, it might be
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1677
useful for simplification.  After re-orienting it and putting $n=1$, we
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1678
derive another useful law: 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1679
\[ \gcd(k,k)=k \]
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1680
Substituting values for variables --- instantiation --- is a forward step. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1681
Re-orientation works by applying the symmetry of equality to 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1682
an equation, so it too is a forward step.  
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1683
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1684
\subsection{The {\tt\slshape of} and {\tt\slshape THEN} Directives}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1685
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1686
Let us reproduce our examples in Isabelle.  Recall that in
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1687
\S\ref{sec:recdef-simplification} we declared the recursive function
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1688
\isa{gcd}:
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1689
\begin{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1690
\isacommand{consts}\ gcd\ ::\ "nat*nat\ \isasymRightarrow\ nat"\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1691
\isacommand{recdef}\ gcd\ "measure\ ((\isasymlambda(m,n).n))"\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1692
\ \ \ \ "gcd\ (m,n)\ =\ (if\ n=0\ then\ m\ else\ gcd(n,\ m\ mod\ n))"
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1693
\end{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1694
%
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1695
From this definition, it is possible to prove the 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1696
distributive law.  
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1697
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1698
?k\ *\ gcd\ (?m,\ ?n)\ =\ gcd\ (?k\ *\ ?m,\ ?k\ *\ ?n)
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1699
\rulename{gcd_mult_distrib2}
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1700
\end{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1701
Now we can carry out the derivation shown above.
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1702
The first step is to replace \isa{?m} by~1.  
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1703
The \isa{of}\indexbold{*of (directive)}
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1704
directive
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1705
refers to variables not by name but by their order of occurrence in the theorem. 
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1706
In this case, the variables  are \isa{?k}, \isa{?m} and~\isa{?n}. So, the
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1707
expression
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1708
\hbox{\texttt{[of k 1]}} replaces \isa{?k} by~\isa{k} and \isa{?m}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1709
by~\isa{1}.
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1710
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1711
\isacommand{lemmas}\ gcd_mult_0\ =\ gcd_mult_distrib2\ [of\ k\ 1]
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1712
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1713
%
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1714
The keyword \isacommand{lemmas}\index{lemmas@\isacommand{lemmas}|bold}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1715
declares a new theorem, which can be derived
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1716
from an existing one using attributes such as \isa{[of~k~1]}.
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1717
The command 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1718
\isa{thm gcd_mult_0}
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1719
displays the result:
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1720
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1721
\ \ \ \ \ k\ *\ gcd\ (1,\ ?n)\ =\ gcd\ (k\ *\ 1,\ k\ *\ ?n)
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1722
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1723
Something is odd: {\isa{k}} is an ordinary variable, while {\isa{?n}} 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1724
is schematic.  We did not specify an instantiation 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1725
for {\isa{?n}}.  In its present form, the theorem does not allow 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1726
substitution for {\isa{k}}.  One solution is to avoid giving an instantiation for
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1727
\isa{?k}: instead of a term we can put an underscore~(\isa{_}).  For example,
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1728
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1729
\ \ \ \ \ gcd_mult_distrib2\ [of\ _\ 1]
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1730
\end{isabelle}
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1731
replaces \isa{?m} by~\isa{1} but leaves \isa{?k} unchanged.  
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1732
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1733
The next step is to put
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1734
the theorem \isa{gcd_mult_0} into a simplified form, performing the steps 
10978
5eebea8f359f *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10971
diff changeset
  1735
$\gcd(1,n)=1$ and $k\times1=k$.  The \isaindexbold{simplified}
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1736
attribute takes a theorem
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1737
and returns the result of simplifying it, with respect to the default
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1738
simplification rules:
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1739
\begin{isabelle}
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1740
\isacommand{lemmas}\ gcd_mult_1\ =\ gcd_mult_0\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1741
[simplified]%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1742
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1743
%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1744
Again, we display the resulting theorem:
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1745
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1746
\ \ \ \ \ k\ =\ gcd\ (k,\ k\ *\ ?n)
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1747
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1748
%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1749
To re-orient the equation requires the symmetry rule:
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1750
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1751
?s\ =\ ?t\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1752
\isasymLongrightarrow\ ?t\ =\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1753
?s%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1754
\rulename{sym}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1755
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1756
The following declaration gives our equation to \isa{sym}:
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1757
\begin{isabelle}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1758
\ \ \ \isacommand{lemmas}\ gcd_mult\ =\ gcd_mult_1\ [THEN\ sym]
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1759
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1760
%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1761
Here is the result:
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1762
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1763
\ \ \ \ \ gcd\ (k,\ k\ *\ ?n)\ =\ k%
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1764
\end{isabelle}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1765
\isa{THEN~sym}\indexbold{*THEN (directive)} gives the current theorem to the
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1766
rule \isa{sym} and returns the resulting conclusion.  The effect is to
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1767
exchange the two operands of the equality. Typically \isa{THEN} is used
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1768
with destruction rules.  Also useful is \isa{THEN~spec}, which removes the
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1769
quantifier from a theorem of the form $\forall x.\,P$, and \isa{THEN~mp},
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1770
which converts the implication $P\imp Q$ into the rule
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1771
$\vcenter{\infer{Q}{P}}$. Similar to \isa{mp} are the following two rules,
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1772
which extract  the two directions of reasoning about a boolean equivalence:
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1773
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1774
\isasymlbrakk?Q\ =\ ?P;\ ?Q\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?P%
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1775
\rulename{iffD1}%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1776
\isanewline
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1777
\isasymlbrakk?P\ =\ ?Q;\ ?Q\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?P%
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1778
\rulename{iffD2}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1779
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1780
%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1781
Normally we would never name the intermediate theorems
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1782
such as \isa{gcd_mult_0} and
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1783
\isa{gcd_mult_1} but would combine
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1784
the three forward steps: 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1785
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1786
\isacommand{lemmas}\ gcd_mult\ =\ gcd_mult_distrib2\ [of\ k\ 1,\ simplified,\ THEN\ sym]%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1787
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1788
The directives, or attributes, are processed from left to right.  This
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1789
declaration of \isa{gcd_mult} is equivalent to the
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1790
previous one.
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1791
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1792
Such declarations can make the proof script hard to read.  Better   
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1793
is to state the new lemma explicitly and to prove it using a single
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1794
\isa{rule} method whose operand is expressed using forward reasoning:
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1795
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1796
\isacommand{lemma}\ gcd_mult\
10301
paulson
parents: 10295
diff changeset
  1797
[simp]:\
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1798
"gcd(k,\ k*n)\ =\ k"\isanewline
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1799
\isacommand{by}\ (rule\ gcd_mult_distrib2\ [of\ k\ 1,\ simplified,\ THEN\ sym])
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1800
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1801
Compared with the previous proof of \isa{gcd_mult}, this
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1802
version shows the reader what has been proved.  Also, the result will be processed
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1803
in the normal way.  In particular, Isabelle generalizes over all variables: the
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1804
resulting theorem will have {\isa{?k}} instead of {\isa{k}}.
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1805
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1806
At the start  of this section, we also saw a proof of $\gcd(k,k)=k$.  Here
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1807
is the Isabelle version: 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1808
\begin{isabelle}
10301
paulson
parents: 10295
diff changeset
  1809
\isacommand{lemma}\ gcd_self\ [simp]:\ "gcd(k,k)\ =\ k"\isanewline
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1810
\isacommand{by}\ (rule\ gcd_mult\ [of\ k\ 1,\ simplified])
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1811
\end{isabelle}
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1812
11179
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
  1813
\begin{exercise}
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
  1814
In \S\ref{sec:subst} the method \isa{subst\ mult_commute} was applied.  How
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
  1815
can we achieve the same effect using \isa{THEN} with the rule \isa{ssubst}?
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
  1816
% answer  rule (mult_commute [THEN ssubst])
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
  1817
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
  1818
\end{exercise}
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1819
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1820
\subsection{The {\tt\slshape OF} Directive}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1821
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1822
\index{*OF (directive)|(}%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1823
Recall that \isa{of} generates an instance of a
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1824
rule by specifying values for its variables.  Analogous is \isa{OF}, which
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1825
generates an instance of a rule by specifying facts for its premises.  
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1826
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1827
Below we shall need the 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1828
\emph{divides} relation of number theory: 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1829
\begin{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1830
?m\ dvd\ ?n\ \isasymequiv\ {\isasymexists}k.\ ?n\ =\ ?m\ *\ k
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1831
\rulename{dvd_def}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1832
\end{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1833
%
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1834
For example, this rule states that if $k$ and $n$ are relatively prime
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1835
and if $k$ divides $m\times n$ then $k$ divides $m$.
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1836
\begin{isabelle}
10971
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
  1837
\isasymlbrakk gcd(?k,?n){=}1;\ ?k\ dvd\ ?m * ?n\isasymrbrakk\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1838
\isasymLongrightarrow\ ?k\ dvd\ ?m
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1839
\rulename{relprime_dvd_mult}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1840
\end{isabelle}
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1841
We can use \isa{OF} to create an instance of this rule.
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1842
First, we
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1843
prove an instance of its first premise:
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1844
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1845
\isacommand{lemma}\ relprime_20_81:\ "gcd(\#20,\#81)\ =\ 1"\isanewline
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1846
\isacommand{by}\ (simp\ add:\ gcd.simps)
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1847
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1848
We have evaluated an application of the \isa{gcd} function by
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1849
simplification.  Expression evaluation involving recursive functions is not
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1850
guaranteed to terminate, and it can be slow; Isabelle
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1851
performs arithmetic by  rewriting symbolic bit strings.  Here,
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1852
however, the simplification takes less than one second.  We can
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1853
give this new lemma to \isa{OF}.  The expression
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1854
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1855
\ \ \ \ \ relprime_dvd_mult [OF relprime_20_81]
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1856
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1857
yields the theorem
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1858
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1859
\ \ \ \ \ \#20\ dvd\ (?m\ *\ \#81)\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ \#20\ dvd\ ?m%
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1860
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1861
%
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1862
\isa{OF} takes any number of operands.  Consider 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1863
the following facts about the divides relation: 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1864
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1865
\isasymlbrakk?k\ dvd\ ?m;\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1866
?k\ dvd\ ?n\isasymrbrakk\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1867
\isasymLongrightarrow\ ?k\ dvd\
10971
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
  1868
?m\ +\ ?n
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1869
\rulename{dvd_add}\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1870
?m\ dvd\ ?m%
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1871
\rulename{dvd_refl}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1872
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1873
Let us supply \isa{dvd_refl} for each of the premises of \isa{dvd_add}:
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1874
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1875
\ \ \ \ \ dvd_add [OF dvd_refl dvd_refl]
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1876
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1877
Here is the theorem that we have expressed: 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1878
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1879
\ \ \ \ \ ?k\ dvd\ (?k\ +\ ?k)
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1880
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1881
As with \isa{of}, we can use the \isa{_} symbol to leave some positions
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1882
unspecified:
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1883
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1884
\ \ \ \ \ dvd_add [OF _ dvd_refl]
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1885
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1886
The result is 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1887
\begin{isabelle}
10971
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
  1888
\ \ \ \ \ ?k\ dvd\ ?m\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?k\ dvd\ ?m\ +\ ?k
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1889
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1890
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1891
You may have noticed that \isa{THEN} and \isa{OF} are based on 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1892
the same idea, namely to combine two rules.  They differ in the
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1893
order of the combination and thus in their effect.  We use \isa{THEN}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1894
typically with a destruction rule to extract a subformula of the current
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1895
theorem.  We use \isa{OF} with a list of facts to generate an instance of
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1896
the current theorem.%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1897
\index{*OF (directive)|)}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1898
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1899
Here is a summary of some primitives for forward reasoning:
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1900
\begin{itemize}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1901
\item \isa{of} instantiates the variables of a rule to a list of terms
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1902
\item \isa{OF} applies a rule to a list of theorems
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1903
\item \isa{THEN} gives a theorem to a named rule and returns the
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1904
conclusion 
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1905
%\item \isa{rule_format} puts a theorem into standard form
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1906
%  by removing \isa{\isasymlongrightarrow} and~\isa{\isasymforall}
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1907
\item \isa{simplified} applies the simplifier to a theorem
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1908
\item \isacommand{lemmas} assigns a name to the theorem produced by the
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1909
attributes above
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1910
\end{itemize}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1911
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1912
10848
7b3ee4695fe6 various changes including the SOME examples, rule_format and "by"
paulson
parents: 10792
diff changeset
  1913
\section{Methods for Forward Proof}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1914
10967
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1915
We have seen that the forward proof directives work well within a backward 
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1916
proof.  There are many ways to achieve a forward style using our existing
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1917
proof methods.  We shall also meet some new methods that perform forward
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1918
reasoning.  
10967
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1919
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1920
The methods \isa{drule}, \isa{frule}, \isa{drule_tac}, etc.,
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1921
reason forward from a subgoal.  We have seen them already, using rules such as
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1922
\isa{mp} and
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1923
\isa{spec} to operate on formulae.  They can also operate on terms, using rules
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1924
such as these:
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1925
\begin{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1926
x\ =\ y\ \isasymLongrightarrow \ f\ x\ =\ f\ y%
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1927
\rulename{arg_cong}\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1928
i\ \isasymle \ j\ \isasymLongrightarrow \ i\ *\ k\ \isasymle \ j\ *\ k%
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1929
\rulename{mult_le_mono1}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1930
\end{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1931
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1932
For example, let us prove a fact about divisibility in the natural numbers:
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1933
\begin{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1934
\isacommand{lemma}\ "\#2\ \isasymle \ u\ \isasymLongrightarrow \ u*m\ \isasymnoteq
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1935
\ Suc(u*n)"\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1936
\isacommand{apply}\ intro\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1937
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk \#2\ \isasymle \ u;\ u\ *\ m\ =\ Suc\ (u\ *\ n)\isasymrbrakk \ \isasymLongrightarrow \ False%
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1938
\end{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1939
%
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1940
The key step is to apply the function \ldots\isa{mod\ u} to both sides of the
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1941
equation
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1942
\isa{u*m\ =\ Suc(u*n)}:\index{*drule_tac (method)}
10967
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1943
\begin{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1944
\isacommand{apply}\ (drule_tac\ f="\isasymlambda x.\ x\ mod\ u"\ \isakeyword{in}\
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1945
arg_cong)\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1946
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk \#2\ \isasymle \ u;\ u\ *\ m\ mod\ u\ =\ Suc\ (u\ *\ n)\ mod\
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1947
u\isasymrbrakk \ \isasymLongrightarrow \ False
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1948
\end{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1949
%
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1950
Simplification reduces the left side to 0 and the right side to~1, yielding the
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1951
required contradiction.
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1952
\begin{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1953
\isacommand{apply}\ (simp\ add:\ mod_Suc)\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1954
\isacommand{done}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1955
\end{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1956
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1957
Our proof has used a fact about remainder:
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1958
\begin{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1959
Suc\ m\ mod\ n\ =\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1960
(if\ Suc\ (m\ mod\ n)\ =\ n\ then\ 0\ else\ Suc\ (m\ mod\ n))
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1961
\rulename{mod_Suc}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1962
\end{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  1963
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1964
\subsection{The Method {\tt\slshape insert}}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1965
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1966
\index{*insert(method)|(}%
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1967
The \isa{insert} method
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1968
inserts a given theorem as a new assumption of the current subgoal.  This
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1969
already is a forward step; moreover, we may (as always when using a
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  1970
theorem) apply
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1971
\isa{of}, \isa{THEN} and other directives.  The new assumption can then
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1972
be used to help prove the subgoal.
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1973
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1974
For example, consider this theorem about the divides relation.  The first
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1975
proof step inserts the distributive law for
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1976
\isa{gcd}.  We specify its variables as shown. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1977
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1978
\isacommand{lemma}\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1979
relprime_dvd_mult:\isanewline
11179
bee6673b020a subst method and a new section on rule, rule_tac, etc
paulson
parents: 11159
diff changeset
  1980
\ \ \ \ \ \ \ "\isasymlbrakk gcd(k,n){=}1;\ k\ dvd\ m*n\isasymrbrakk\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1981
\isasymLongrightarrow\ k\ dvd\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1982
m"\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1983
\isacommand{apply}\ (insert\ gcd_mult_distrib2\ [of\ m\ k\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1984
n])
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1985
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1986
In the resulting subgoal, note how the equation has been 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1987
inserted: 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1988
\begin{isabelle}
10971
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
  1989
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk gcd\ (k,\ n)\ =\ 1;\ k\ dvd\ m\ *\ n{;}\ m\ *\ gcd\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1990
(k,\ n)\
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  1991
=\ gcd\ (m\ *\ k,\ m\ *\ n)\isasymrbrakk\isanewline
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1992
\ \ \ \ \isasymLongrightarrow\ k\ dvd\ m
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1993
\end{isabelle}
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1994
The next proof step utilizes the assumption \isa{gcd(k,n)\ =\ 1}: 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  1995
\begin{isabelle}
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1996
\isacommand{apply}(simp)\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1997
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk gcd\ (k,\ n)\ =\ 1;\ k\ dvd\
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  1998
(m\ *\ n){;}
10971
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
  1999
\ m\ =\ gcd\ (m\ *\ k,\ m\ *\ n)\isasymrbrakk\isanewline
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2000
\ \ \ \ \isasymLongrightarrow\ k\ dvd\ m
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2001
\end{isabelle}
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2002
Simplification has yielded an equation for~\isa{m}.  The rest of the proof
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2003
is omitted.
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2004
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2005
\medskip
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2006
Here is another demonstration of \isa{insert}.  \REMARK{Effect with
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2007
unknowns?} Division  and remainder obey a well-known law: 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2008
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  2009
(?m\ div\ ?n)\ *\ ?n\ +\ ?m\ mod\ ?n\ =\ ?m
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2010
\rulename{mod_div_equality}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2011
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2012
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2013
We refer to this law explicitly in the following proof: 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2014
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2015
\isacommand{lemma}\ div_mult_self_is_m:\ \isanewline
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  2016
\ \ \ \ \ \ "0{\isacharless}n\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ (m*n)\ div\ n\ =\
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  2017
(m::nat)"\isanewline
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  2018
\isacommand{apply}\ (insert\ mod_div_equality\ [of\ "m*n"\ n])\isanewline
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2019
\isacommand{apply}\ (simp)\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2020
\isacommand{done}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2021
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2022
The first step inserts the law, specifying \isa{m*n} and
10301
paulson
parents: 10295
diff changeset
  2023
\isa{n} for its variables.  Notice that non-trivial expressions must be
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2024
enclosed in quotation marks.  Here is the resulting 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2025
subgoal, with its new assumption: 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2026
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2027
%0\ \isacharless\ n\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ (m\
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  2028
%*\ n)\ div\ n\ =\ m\isanewline
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2029
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk0\ \isacharless\
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  2030
n;\ \ (m\ *\ n)\ div\ n\ *\ n\ +\ (m\ *\ n)\ mod\ n\
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  2031
=\ m\ *\ n\isasymrbrakk\isanewline
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  2032
\ \ \ \ \isasymLongrightarrow\ (m\ *\ n)\ div\ n\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2033
=\ m
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2034
\end{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  2035
Simplification reduces \isa{(m\ *\ n)\ mod\ n} to zero.
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2036
Then it cancels the factor~\isa{n} on both
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  2037
sides of the equation, proving the theorem.%
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  2038
\index{*insert(method)|)}
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2039
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2040
\subsection{The Method {\tt\slshape subgoal_tac}}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2041
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2042
\index{*subgoal_tac (method)}%
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2043
A similar method is \isa{subgoal_tac}.
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  2044
Instead
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  2045
of inserting  a theorem as an assumption, it inserts an arbitrary formula. 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2046
This formula must be proved later as a separate subgoal. The 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2047
idea is to claim that the formula holds on the basis of the current 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2048
assumptions, to use this claim to complete the proof, and finally 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2049
to justify the claim. It is a valuable means of giving the proof 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2050
some structure. The explicit formula will be more readable than 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2051
proof commands that yield that formula indirectly.
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2052
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2053
Look at the following example. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2054
\begin{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2055
\isacommand{lemma}\ "\isasymlbrakk(z::int)\ <\ \#37;\ \#66\ <\ \#2*z;\ z*z\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2056
\isasymnoteq\ \#1225;\ Q(\#34);\ Q(\#36)\isasymrbrakk\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2057
\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \,\isasymLongrightarrow\ Q(z)"\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2058
\isacommand{apply}\ (subgoal_tac\ "z\ =\ \#34\ \isasymor\ z\ =\
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2059
\#36")\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2060
\isacommand{apply}\ blast\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2061
\isacommand{apply}\ (subgoal_tac\ "z\ \isasymnoteq\ \#35")\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2062
\isacommand{apply}\ arith\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2063
\isacommand{apply}\ force\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2064
\isacommand{done}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2065
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2066
Let us prove it informally.  The first assumption tells us 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2067
that \isa{z} is no greater than 36. The second tells us that \isa{z} 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2068
is at least 34. The third assumption tells us that \isa{z} cannot be 35, since
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2069
$35\times35=1225$.  So \isa{z} is either 34 or 36, and since \isa{Q} holds for
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2070
both of those  values, we have the conclusion. 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2071
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2072
The Isabelle proof closely follows this reasoning. The first 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2073
step is to claim that \isa{z} is either 34 or 36. The resulting proof 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2074
state gives us two subgoals: 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2075
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  2076
%\isasymlbrakk z\ <\ \#37;\ \#66\ <\ \#2\ *\ z;\ z\ *\ z\ \isasymnoteq\ \#1225;\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2077
%Q\ \#34;\ Q\ \#36\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ Q\ z\isanewline
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  2078
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk z\ <\ \#37;\ \#66\ <\ \#2\ *\ z;\ z\ *\ z\ \isasymnoteq\ \#1225;\ Q\ \#34;\ Q\ \#36;\isanewline
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2079
\ \ \ \ \ z\ =\ \#34\ \isasymor\ z\ =\ \#36\isasymrbrakk\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2080
\ \ \ \ \isasymLongrightarrow\ Q\ z\isanewline
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  2081
\ 2.\ \isasymlbrakk z\ <\ \#37;\ \#66\ <\ \#2\ *\ z;\ z\ *\ z\ \isasymnoteq\ \#1225;\ Q\ \#34;\ Q\ \#36\isasymrbrakk\isanewline
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2082
\ \ \ \ \isasymLongrightarrow\ z\ =\ \#34\ \isasymor\ z\ =\ \#36
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2083
\end{isabelle}
10971
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
  2084
The first subgoal is trivial (\isa{blast}), but for the second Isabelle needs help to eliminate
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2085
the case
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  2086
\isa{z}=35.  The second invocation  of {\isa{subgoal_tac}} leaves two
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2087
subgoals: 
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2088
\begin{isabelle}
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  2089
\ 1.\ \isasymlbrakk z\ <\ \#37;\ \#66\ <\ \#2\ *\ z;\ z\ *\ z\ \isasymnoteq\
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2090
\#1225;\ Q\ \#34;\ Q\ \#36;\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2091
\ \ \ \ \ z\ \isasymnoteq\ \#35\isasymrbrakk\isanewline
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2092
\ \ \ \ \isasymLongrightarrow\ z\ =\ \#34\ \isasymor\ z\ =\ \#36\isanewline
10596
77951eaeb5b0 tidying
paulson
parents: 10578
diff changeset
  2093
\ 2.\ \isasymlbrakk z\ <\ \#37;\ \#66\ <\ \#2\ *\ z;\ z\ *\ z\ \isasymnoteq\ \#1225;\ Q\ \#34;\ Q\ \#36\isasymrbrakk\isanewline
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2094
\ \ \ \ \isasymLongrightarrow\ z\ \isasymnoteq\ \#35
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2095
\end{isabelle}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2096
10971
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
  2097
Assuming that \isa{z} is not 35, the first subgoal follows by linear arithmetic
6852682eaf16 *** empty log message ***
nipkow
parents: 10967
diff changeset
  2098
(\isa{arith}). For the second subgoal we apply the method \isa{force}, 
10295
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2099
which proceeds by assuming that \isa{z}=35 and arriving at a contradiction.
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2100
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2101
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2102
\medskip
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2103
Summary of these methods:
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2104
\begin{itemize}
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2105
\item {\isa{insert}} adds a theorem as a new assumption
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2106
\item {\isa{subgoal_tac}} adds a formula as a new assumption and leaves the
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2107
subgoal of proving that formula
8eb12693cead the Rules chapter and theories
paulson
parents:
diff changeset
  2108
\end{itemize}
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  2109
\index{forward proof|)}
10967
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2110
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2111
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2112
\section{Managing Large Proofs}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2113
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2114
Naturally you should try to divide proofs into manageable parts.  Look for lemmas
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2115
that can be proved separately.  Sometimes you will observe that they are
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2116
instances of much simpler facts.  On other occasions, no lemmas suggest themselves
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2117
and you are forced to cope with a long proof involving many subgoals.  
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2118
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2119
\subsection{Tacticals, or Control Structures}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2120
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2121
If the proof is long, perhaps it at least has some regularity.  Then you can
11077
8f4fa58e6fba snapshot of a new version
paulson
parents: 10983
diff changeset
  2122
express it more concisely using \bfindex{tacticals}, which provide control
10967
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2123
structures.  Here is a proof (it would be a one-liner using
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2124
\isa{blast}, but forget that) that contains a series of repeated
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2125
commands:
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2126
%
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2127
\begin{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2128
\isacommand{lemma}\ "\isasymlbrakk P\isasymlongrightarrow Q;\
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2129
Q\isasymlongrightarrow R;\ R\isasymlongrightarrow S;\ P\isasymrbrakk \
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2130
\isasymLongrightarrow \ S"\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2131
\isacommand{apply}\ (drule\ mp,\ assumption)\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2132
\isacommand{apply}\ (drule\ mp,\ assumption)\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2133
\isacommand{apply}\ (drule\ mp,\ assumption)\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2134
\isacommand{apply}\ (assumption)\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2135
\isacommand{done}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2136
\end{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2137
%
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2138
Each of the three identical commands finds an implication and proves its
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2139
antecedent by assumption.  The first one finds \isa{P\isasymlongrightarrow Q} and
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2140
\isa{P}, concluding~\isa{Q}; the second one concludes~\isa{R} and the third one
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2141
concludes~\isa{S}.  The final step matches the assumption \isa{S} with the goal to
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2142
be proved.
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2143
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2144
Suffixing a method with a plus sign~(\isa+)
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2145
expresses one or more repetitions:
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2146
\begin{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2147
\isacommand{lemma}\ "\isasymlbrakk P\isasymlongrightarrow Q;\ Q\isasymlongrightarrow R;\ R\isasymlongrightarrow S;\ P\isasymrbrakk \ \isasymLongrightarrow \ S"\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2148
\isacommand{by}\ (drule\ mp,\ assumption)+
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2149
\end{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2150
%
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2151
Using \isacommand{by} takes care of the final use of \isa{assumption}.  The new
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2152
proof is more concise.  It is also more general: the repetitive method works
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2153
for a chain of implications having any length, not just three.
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2154
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2155
Choice is another control structure.  Separating two methods by a vertical
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2156
bar~(\isa|) gives the effect of applying the first method, and if that fails,
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2157
trying the second.  It can be combined with repetition, when the choice must be
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2158
made over and over again.  Here is a chain of implications in which most of the
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2159
antecedents are proved by assumption, but one is proved by arithmetic:
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2160
\begin{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2161
\isacommand{lemma}\ "\isasymlbrakk Q\isasymlongrightarrow R;\ P\isasymlongrightarrow Q;\ x<\#5\isasymlongrightarrow P;\
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2162
Suc\ x\ <\ \#5\isasymrbrakk \ \isasymLongrightarrow \ R"\ \isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2163
\isacommand{by}\ (drule\ mp,\ (assumption|arith))+
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2164
\end{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2165
The \isa{arith}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2166
method can prove $x<5$ from $x+1<5$, but it cannot duplicate the effect of
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2167
\isa{assumption}.  Therefore, we combine these methods using the choice
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2168
operator.
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2169
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2170
A postfixed question mark~(\isa?) expresses zero or one repetitions of a method. 
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2171
It can also be viewed as the choice between executing a method and doing nothing. 
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2172
It is useless at top level but may be valuable within other control structures. 
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2173
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2174
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2175
\subsection{Subgoal Numbering}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2176
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2177
Another problem in large proofs is contending with huge
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2178
subgoals or many subgoals.  Induction can produce a proof state that looks
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2179
like this:
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2180
\begin{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2181
\ 1.\ bigsubgoal1\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2182
\ 2.\ bigsubgoal2\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2183
\ 3.\ bigsubgoal3\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2184
\ 4.\ bigsubgoal4\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2185
\ 5.\ bigsubgoal5\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2186
\ 6.\ bigsubgoal6
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2187
\end{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2188
If each \isa{bigsubgoal} is 15 lines or so, the proof state will be too big to
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2189
scroll through.  By default, Isabelle displays at most 10 subgoals.  The 
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2190
\isacommand{pr} command lets you change this limit:
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2191
\begin{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2192
\isacommand{pr}\ 2\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2193
\ 1.\ bigsubgoal1\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2194
\ 2.\ bigsubgoal2\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2195
A total of 6 subgoals...
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2196
\end{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2197
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2198
\medskip
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2199
All methods apply to the first subgoal.
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2200
Sometimes, not only in a large proof, you may want to focus on some other
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2201
subgoal.  Then you should try the commands \isacommand{defer} or \isacommand{prefer}.
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2202
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2203
In the following example, the first subgoal looks hard, while the others
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2204
look as if \isa{blast} alone could prove them:
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2205
%\begin{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2206
%\isacommand{lemma}\ "hard\ \isasymand \ (P\ \isasymor \ \isachartilde P)\ \isasymand \ (Q\isasymlongrightarrow Q)"\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2207
%\isacommand{apply}\ intro
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2208
%\end{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2209
\begin{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2210
\ 1.\ hard\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2211
\ 2.\ \isasymnot \ \isasymnot \ P\ \isasymLongrightarrow \ P\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2212
\ 3.\ Q\ \isasymLongrightarrow \ Q%
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2213
\end{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2214
%
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2215
The \isacommand{defer} command moves the first subgoal into the last position.
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2216
\begin{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2217
\isacommand{defer}\ 1\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2218
\ 1.\ \isasymnot \ \isasymnot \ P\ \isasymLongrightarrow \ P\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2219
\ 2.\ Q\ \isasymLongrightarrow \ Q\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2220
\ 3.\ hard%
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2221
\end{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2222
%
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2223
Now we apply \isa{blast} repeatedly to the easy subgoals:
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2224
\begin{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2225
\isacommand{apply}\ blast+\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2226
\ 1.\ hard%
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2227
\end{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2228
Using \isacommand{defer}, we have cleared away the trivial parts of the proof so
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2229
that we can devote attention to the difficult part.
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2230
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2231
\medskip
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2232
The \isacommand{prefer} command moves the specified subgoal into the
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2233
first position.  For example, if you suspect that one of your subgoals is
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2234
invalid (not a theorem), then you should investigate that subgoal first.  If it
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2235
cannot be proved, then there is no point in proving the other subgoals.
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2236
\begin{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2237
\ 1.\ ok1\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2238
\ 2.\ ok2\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2239
\ 3.\ doubtful%
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2240
\end{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2241
%
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2242
We decide to work on the third subgoal.
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2243
\begin{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2244
\isacommand{prefer}\ 3\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2245
\ 1.\ doubtful\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2246
\ 2.\ ok1\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2247
\ 3.\ ok2
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2248
\end{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2249
If we manage to prove \isa{doubtful}, then we can work on the other
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2250
subgoals, confident that we are not wasting our time.  Finally we revise the
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2251
proof script to remove the \isacommand{prefer} command, since we needed it only to
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2252
focus our exploration.  The previous example is different: its use of
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2253
\isacommand{defer} stops trivial subgoals from cluttering the rest of the
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2254
proof.  Even there, we should consider proving \isa{hard} as a preliminary
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2255
lemma.  Always seek ways to streamline your proofs.
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2256
 
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2257
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2258
\medskip
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2259
Summary:
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2260
\begin{itemize}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2261
\item the control structures \isa+, \isa? and \isa| help express complicated proofs
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2262
\item the \isacommand{pr} command can limit the number of subgoals to display
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2263
\item the \isacommand{defer} and \isacommand{prefer} commands move a 
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2264
subgoal to the last or first position
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2265
\end{itemize}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2266
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2267
\begin{exercise}
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2268
Explain the use of \isa? and \isa+ in this proof.
10967
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2269
\begin{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2270
\isacommand{lemma}\ "\isasymlbrakk P\isasymand Q\isasymlongrightarrow R;\ P\isasymlongrightarrow Q;\ P\isasymrbrakk \ \isasymLongrightarrow \ R"\isanewline
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2271
\isacommand{by}\ (drule\ mp,\ intro?,\ assumption+)+
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2272
\end{isabelle}
69937e62a28e arg_cong, tacticals, pr, defer, prefer
paulson
parents: 10887
diff changeset
  2273
\end{exercise}
11080
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2274
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2275
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2276
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2277
\section{Proving the Correctness of Euclid's Algorithm}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2278
\label{sec:proving-euclid}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2279
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2280
\index{Euclid's algorithm|(}\index{*gcd (function)|(}%
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2281
A brief development will demonstrate the techniques of this chapter,
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2282
including \isa{blast} applied with additional rules.  We shall also see
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2283
\isa{case_tac} used to perform a Boolean case split.
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2284
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2285
Let us prove that \isa{gcd} computes the greatest common
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2286
divisor of its two arguments.  
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2287
%
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2288
We use induction: \isa{gcd.induct} is the
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2289
induction rule returned by \isa{recdef}.  We simplify using
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2290
rules proved in \S\ref{sec:recdef-simplification}, since rewriting by the
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2291
definition of \isa{gcd} can loop.
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2292
\begin{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2293
\isacommand{lemma}\ gcd_dvd_both:\ "(gcd(m,n)\ dvd\ m)\ \isasymand\ (gcd(m,n)\ dvd\
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2294
n)"
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2295
\end{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2296
The induction formula must be a conjunction.  In the
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2297
inductive step, each conjunct establishes the other. 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2298
\begin{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2299
\isacommand{apply}\ (induct_tac\ m\ n\ rule:\ gcd.induct)\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2300
\ 1.\ \isasymAnd m\ n.\ n\ \isasymnoteq \ 0\ \isasymlongrightarrow \isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2301
\isaindent{\ 1.\ \isasymAnd m\ n.\ }gcd\ (n,\ m\ mod\ n)\ dvd\ n\ \isasymand
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2302
\ gcd\ (n,\ m\ mod\ n)\ dvd\ m\ mod\ n\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2303
\isaindent{\ 1.\ \isasymAnd m\ n.\ }\isasymLongrightarrow\ gcd\ (m,\ n)\
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2304
dvd\ m\ \isasymand \ gcd\ (m,\ n)\ dvd\ n%
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2305
\end{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2306
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2307
The conditional induction hypothesis suggests doing a case
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2308
analysis on \isa{n=0}.  We apply \isa{case_tac} with type
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2309
\isa{bool} --- and not with a datatype, as we have done until now.  Since
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2310
\isa{nat} is a datatype, we could have written
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2311
\isa{case_tac~"n"} instead of \isa{case_tac~"n=0"}.  However, the definition
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2312
of \isa{gcd} makes a Boolean decision:
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2313
\begin{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2314
\ \ \ \ "gcd\ (m,n)\ =\ (if\ n=0\ then\ m\ else\ gcd(n,\ m\ mod\ n))"
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2315
\end{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2316
Proofs about a function frequently follow the function's definition, so we perform
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2317
case analysis over the same formula.
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2318
\begin{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2319
\isacommand{apply}\ (case_tac\ "n=0")\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2320
\ 1.\ \isasymAnd m\ n.\ \isasymlbrakk n\ \isasymnoteq \ 0\ \isasymlongrightarrow \isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2321
\isaindent{\ 1.\ \isasymAnd m\ n.\ \isasymlbrakk }gcd\ (n,\ m\ mod\ n)\ dvd\ n\ \isasymand \ gcd\ (n,\ m\ mod\ n)\ dvd\ m\ mod\ n;\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2322
\isaindent{\ 1.\ \isasymAnd m\ n.\ \ }n\ =\ 0\isasymrbrakk \isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2323
\isaindent{\ 1.\ \isasymAnd m\ n.\ }\isasymLongrightarrow \ gcd\ (m,\ n)\ dvd\ m\ \isasymand \ gcd\ (m,\ n)\ dvd\ n\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2324
\ 2.\ \isasymAnd m\ n.\ \isasymlbrakk n\ \isasymnoteq \ 0\ \isasymlongrightarrow \isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2325
\isaindent{\ 2.\ \isasymAnd m\ n.\ \isasymlbrakk }gcd\ (n,\ m\ mod\ n)\ dvd\ n\ \isasymand \ gcd\ (n,\ m\ mod\ n)\ dvd\ m\ mod\ n;\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2326
\isaindent{\ 2.\ \isasymAnd m\ n.\ \ }n\ \isasymnoteq \ 0\isasymrbrakk
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2327
\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2328
\isaindent{\ 2.\ \isasymAnd m\ n.\ }\isasymLongrightarrow \ gcd\ (m,\ n)\ dvd\ m\ \isasymand \ gcd\ (m,\ n)\ dvd\ n%
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2329
\end{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2330
%
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2331
Simplification leaves one subgoal: 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2332
\begin{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2333
\isacommand{apply}\ (simp_all)\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2334
\ 1.\ \isasymAnd m\ n.\ \isasymlbrakk 0\ <\ n;\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2335
\isaindent{\ 1.\ \isasymAnd m\ n.\ \ }gcd\ (n,\ m\ mod\ n)\ dvd\ n\
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2336
\isasymand \ gcd\ (n,\ m\ mod\ n)\ dvd\ m\ mod\
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2337
n\isasymrbrakk \isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2338
\isaindent{\ 1.\ \isasymAnd m\ n.\ }\isasymLongrightarrow \ gcd\ (n,\ m\ mod\ n)\ dvd\ m%
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2339
\end{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2340
%
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2341
Here, we can use \isa{blast}.  
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2342
One of the assumptions, the induction hypothesis, is a conjunction. 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2343
The two divides relationships it asserts are enough to prove 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2344
the conclusion, for we have the following theorem at our disposal: 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2345
\begin{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2346
\isasymlbrakk?k\ dvd\ (?m\ mod\ ?n){;}\ ?k\ dvd\ ?n\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?k\ dvd\ ?m%
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2347
\rulename{dvd_mod_imp_dvd}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2348
\end{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2349
%
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2350
This theorem can be applied in various ways.  As an introduction rule, it
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2351
would cause backward chaining from  the conclusion (namely
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2352
\isa{?k~dvd~?m}) to the two premises, which 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2353
also involve the divides relation. This process does not look promising
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2354
and could easily loop.  More sensible is  to apply the rule in the forward
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2355
direction; each step would eliminate an occurrence of the \isa{mod} symbol, so the
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2356
process must terminate.  
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2357
\begin{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2358
\isacommand{apply}\ (blast\ dest:\ dvd_mod_imp_dvd)\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2359
\isacommand{done}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2360
\end{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2361
Attaching the {\isa{dest}} attribute to \isa{dvd_mod_imp_dvd} tells
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2362
\isa{blast} to use it as destruction rule: in the forward direction.
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2363
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2364
\medskip
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2365
We have proved a conjunction.  Now, let us give names to each of the
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2366
two halves:
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2367
\begin{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2368
\isacommand{lemmas}\ gcd_dvd1\ [iff]\ =\ gcd_dvd_both\ [THEN\ conjunct1]\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2369
\isacommand{lemmas}\ gcd_dvd2\ [iff]\ =\ gcd_dvd_both\ [THEN\ conjunct2]%
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2370
\end{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2371
Here we see \isacommand{lemmas}\index{lemmas@\isacommand{lemmas}}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2372
used with the \isa{iff} attribute, which supplies the new theorems to the
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2373
classical reasoner and the simplifier.  Recall that \isa{THEN} is
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2374
frequently used with destruction rules; \isa{THEN conjunct1} extracts the
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2375
first half of a conjunctive theorem.  Given \isa{gcd_dvd_both} it yields
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2376
\begin{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2377
\ \ \ \ \ gcd\ (?m1,\ ?n1)\ dvd\ ?m1
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2378
\end{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2379
The variable names \isa{?m1} and \isa{?n1} arise because
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2380
Isabelle renames schematic variables to prevent 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2381
clashes.  The second \isacommand{lemmas} declaration yields
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2382
\begin{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2383
\ \ \ \ \ gcd\ (?m1,\ ?n1)\ dvd\ ?n1
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2384
\end{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2385
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2386
\medskip
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2387
To complete the verification of the \isa{gcd} function, we must 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2388
prove that it returns the greatest of all the common divisors 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2389
of its arguments.  The proof is by induction, case analysis and simplification.
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2390
\begin{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2391
\isacommand{lemma}\ gcd_greatest\
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2392
[rule_format]:\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2393
\ \ \ \ \ \ \ "k\ dvd\ m\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ k\ dvd\ n\ \isasymlongrightarrow\
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2394
k\ dvd\ gcd(m,n)"
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2395
\end{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2396
%
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2397
The goal is expressed using HOL implication,
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2398
\isa{\isasymlongrightarrow}, because the induction affects the two
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2399
preconditions.  The directive \isa{rule_format} tells Isabelle to replace
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2400
each \isa{\isasymlongrightarrow} by \isa{\isasymLongrightarrow} before
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2401
storing the eventual theorem.  This directive can also remove outer
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2402
universal quantifiers, converting the theorem into the usual format for
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2403
inference rules.  It can replace any series of applications of
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2404
\isa{THEN} to the rules \isa{mp} and \isa{spec}.  We did not have to
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2405
write this:
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2406
\begin{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2407
\ \ \ \ \ \isacommand{lemma}\ gcd_greatest\
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2408
[THEN mp, THEN mp]:\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2409
\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ "k\ dvd\ m\ \isasymlongrightarrow\ k\ dvd\ n\
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2410
\isasymlongrightarrow\ k\ dvd\ gcd(m,n)"
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2411
\end{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2412
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2413
Because we are again reasoning about \isa{gcd}, we perform the same
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2414
induction and case analysis as in the previous proof:
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2415
\begingroup\samepage
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2416
\begin{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2417
\isacommand{apply}\ (induct_tac\ m\ n\ rule:\ gcd.induct)\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2418
\isacommand{apply}\ (case_tac\ "n=0")\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2419
\ 1.\ \isasymAnd m\ n.\ \isasymlbrakk n\ \isasymnoteq \ 0\
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2420
\isasymlongrightarrow \isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2421
\isaindent{\ 1.\ \isasymAnd m\ n.\ \isasymlbrakk }k\ dvd\ n\ \isasymlongrightarrow \ k\ dvd\ m\ mod\ n\ \isasymlongrightarrow \ k\ dvd\ gcd\ (n,\ m\ mod\ n);\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2422
\isaindent{\ 1.\ \isasymAnd m\ n.\ \ }n\ =\ 0\isasymrbrakk \isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2423
\isaindent{\ 1.\ \isasymAnd m\ n.\ }\isasymLongrightarrow \ k\ dvd\ m\ \isasymlongrightarrow \ k\ dvd\ n\ \isasymlongrightarrow \ k\ dvd\ gcd\ (m,\ n)\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2424
\ 2.\ \isasymAnd m\ n.\ \isasymlbrakk n\ \isasymnoteq \ 0\ \isasymlongrightarrow \isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2425
\isaindent{\ 2.\ \isasymAnd m\ n.\ \isasymlbrakk }k\ dvd\ n\ \isasymlongrightarrow \ k\ dvd\ m\ mod\ n\ \isasymlongrightarrow \ k\ dvd\ gcd\ (n,\ m\ mod\ n);\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2426
\isaindent{\ 2.\ \isasymAnd m\ n.\ \ }n\ \isasymnoteq \ 0\isasymrbrakk
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2427
\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2428
\isaindent{\ 2.\ \isasymAnd m\ n.\ }\isasymLongrightarrow \ k\ dvd\ m\ \isasymlongrightarrow \ k\ dvd\ n\ \isasymlongrightarrow \ k\ dvd\ gcd\ (m,\ n)
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2429
\end{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2430
\endgroup
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2431
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2432
\noindent Simplification proves both subgoals. 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2433
\begin{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2434
\isacommand{apply}\ (simp_all\ add:\ dvd_mod)\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2435
\isacommand{done}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2436
\end{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2437
In the first, where \isa{n=0}, the implication becomes trivial: \isa{k\ dvd\
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2438
gcd\ (m,\ n)} goes to~\isa{k\ dvd\ m}.  The second subgoal is proved by
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2439
an unfolding of \isa{gcd}, using this rule about divides:
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2440
\begin{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2441
\isasymlbrakk ?f\ dvd\ ?m;\ ?f\ dvd\ ?n\isasymrbrakk \
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2442
\isasymLongrightarrow \ ?f\ dvd\ ?m\ mod\ ?n%
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2443
\rulename{dvd_mod}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2444
\end{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2445
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2446
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2447
\medskip
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2448
The facts proved above can be summarized as a single logical 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2449
equivalence.  This step gives us a chance to see another application
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2450
of \isa{blast}.
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2451
\begin{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2452
\isacommand{theorem}\ gcd_greatest_iff\ [iff]:\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2453
\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ "(k\ dvd\ gcd(m,n))\ =\ (k\ dvd\ m\ \isasymand\ k\ dvd\
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2454
n)"\isanewline
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2455
\isacommand{by}\ (blast\ intro!:\ gcd_greatest\ intro:\ dvd_trans)
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2456
\end{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2457
This theorem concisely expresses the correctness of the \isa{gcd} 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2458
function. 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2459
We state it with the \isa{iff} attribute so that 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2460
Isabelle can use it to remove some occurrences of \isa{gcd}. 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2461
The theorem has a one-line 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2462
proof using \isa{blast} supplied with two additional introduction 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2463
rules. The exclamation mark 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2464
({\isa{intro}}{\isa{!}})\ signifies safe rules, which are 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2465
applied aggressively.  Rules given without the exclamation mark 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2466
are applied reluctantly and their uses can be undone if 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2467
the search backtracks.  Here the unsafe rule expresses transitivity  
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2468
of the divides relation:
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2469
\begin{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2470
\isasymlbrakk?m\ dvd\ ?n;\ ?n\ dvd\ ?p\isasymrbrakk\ \isasymLongrightarrow\ ?m\ dvd\ ?p%
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2471
\rulename{dvd_trans}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2472
\end{isabelle}
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2473
Applying \isa{dvd_trans} as 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2474
an introduction rule entails a risk of looping, for it multiplies 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2475
occurrences of the divides symbol. However, this proof relies 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2476
on transitivity reasoning.  The rule {\isa{gcd\_greatest}} is safe to apply 
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2477
aggressively because it yields simpler subgoals.  The proof implicitly
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2478
uses \isa{gcd_dvd1} and \isa{gcd_dvd2} as safe rules, because they were
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2479
declared using \isa{iff}.%
22855d091249 various revisions in response to comments from Tobias
paulson
parents: 11077
diff changeset
  2480
\index{Euclid's algorithm|)}\index{*gcd (function)|)}